JP6915654B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn for the success or failure of the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. Is executed in. If the lottery result is a win, the probability of being determined to be a win is higher than the normal normal probability game state after the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine in which one of the probabilistic gaming states is set has been proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-319221

By the way, in such a gaming machine, it has been required to further improve the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can acquire the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. Information acquisition means, a storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the first storage means stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first condition. A discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the first information and executes the second discrimination based on the second information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first discrimination by the discrimination means. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the first discrimination result of the above and the second identification information for showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination on the display means at the same time. It is possible to determine the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods, respectively. Dynamic display period determining means, a pre-determining means for determining the first information or the second information stored in the storage means before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and a predetermining means thereof. A pre-period discriminating means for preliminarily determining the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, and the discriminating means. A probability setting means for setting either a high probability state having a higher probability than the normal time or a low probability state having a probability determined by the normal time lower than the high probability state, and the dynamic display period. A first indicating that the determination means has an effect execution means for executing the effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the determination means, and the determination means has determined that the effect is a specific first determination result. When the mode of the identification information is stopped and displayed, either the first privilege game or the second privilege game different from the first privilege game can be executed, and the probability setting means is the first. The first is based on the fact that the low probability state is set after the end of the first privilege game and the game ball enters a specific area in which the game ball can be entered during the execution of the second privilege game. 2 The high probability state is set after the end of the privilege game , and the effect executed by the effect executing means when the high probability state is set is the first privilege by the prior determination means. When it is determined that the game is to be executed, the first identification information corresponding to the determined first information When the first effect that can identify the remaining period until the dynamic display of the information is started is executed, and it is determined by the pre-determination means that the second privilege game is executed , the determination is made. A second effect capable of identifying the remaining period until the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first information is started is executed, and the gaming machine is subjected to the second privilege by the prior determination means. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area during the second privilege game, which is executed after the first dynamic display period corresponding to the first information determined to be executed is completed. Ru der what effect increasing the rest period after suggested to increase the remaining period of time that is executed by the second effect is executable configured.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means are stored, and a first based on the first information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first condition. A discrimination means that executes discrimination and, based on the establishment of the second condition, executes a second discrimination based on the second information stored in the storage means, and a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means. The display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the above and the second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination on the display means at the same time, and the display control means thereof. A dynamic display period in which the first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be dynamically displayed and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information can be determined from a plurality of dynamic display periods. The determination means, the pre-determination means for determining the first information or the second information stored in the storage means before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the determination of the pre-determination means. Based on the result, the pre-period discriminating means for preliminarily determining the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the probability of being discriminated by the discriminating means. Is determined by the probability setting means for setting either the high probability state higher than the normal time and the low probability state lower than the high probability state, which is the probability in the normal time, and the dynamic display period determining means. An aspect of the first identification information indicating that the effect execution means for executing the effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period and the determination unit has determined the effect to be a specific first determination result. When the stop display is displayed, either the first privilege game or the second privilege game different from the first privilege game can be executed, and the probability setting means ends the first privilege game. Later, the low probability state is set, and the end of the second privilege game is based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific area in which the game ball can be entered during the execution of the second privilege game. The high probability state is set later, and when the high probability state is set, the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that the first privilege game is executed by the predetermined means. When it is determined, the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determined first information starts. When the first effect that can identify the remaining period until the game is executed is executed and it is determined by the pre-determination means that the second privilege game is executed, it corresponds to the determined first information. A second effect capable of identifying the remaining period until the dynamic display of the first identification information is started is executed, and the gaming machine determines that the second privilege game is executed by the pre-determination means. It is executed in the second effect based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area during the second privilege game which is executed after the first dynamic display period corresponding to the first information is completed. and Ru der what the effect of increasing the rest period is executable configured after suggested to increase the time remaining. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time of the probability variation upper limit value in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol holding ball storage area, the special symbol holding ball execution area, the normal symbol holding ball storage area, and the normal symbol holding ball execution area in the 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table in the first embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the addition time selection table 222b in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the sort hold storage area in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the sort hold storage area in the first embodiment. .. It is a figure which shows typically the process of rearranging the reserved symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the process of rearranging the reserved symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation monitoring process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the probability variation period notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a small hit selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 1C is a diagram schematically showing a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are examples of the display mode in the probabilistic game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation period notification process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the period setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, and a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a first starting port 64, and a first. 2 The starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery held for the passing of the game ball to the normal symbol start port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of No. 1 are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (a symbol of "○" or "×" in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit). If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. Is displayed by.

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a hit, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a, which is normally maintained in an upward standing state, is determined counterclockwise from a state in which the ordinary electric accessory 640a stands up substantially vertically. A state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start port 640 by rotating the game ball by an angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) and guiding the game ball to the second start port 640 by the ordinary electric accessory 640a (special). State). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88. At this time, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed among the balls winning in the first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 64 (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the 7-segment blinks). After that, the stop display is displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is out of alignment, the central one segment is lit and a symbol "-" indicating the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but the fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Further, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on the fluctuation pattern that becomes reach and the fluctuation pattern that does not reach. In this way, even when the time is roughly sorted by a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the time information is dynamic. Corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, long reach 1 to 4 is set as a long-term fluctuation pattern. These long reach 1 to 4 are set as a fluctuation pattern that can be selected for the first special symbol (special figure 1) when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong in the high probability state (probability change). Has been done.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time is also applicable to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern (for example, is it a long-time fluctuation pattern? Information about time information determined based on (whether or not, etc.) (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation, etc.) is also applicable.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for winning a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not a jackpot is made is performed, and a judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. conduct. As the jackpot type determined here, two types of jackpot A (15R jackpot) and jackpot B (14R jackpot) are set as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Further, as a jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of jackpot C (15R jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10C).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for the 1R (round) to 14R of the jackpots A to C. Further, the second variable winning device 650 is operated so that the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the 15th round of the jackpot A and the jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled so as to shift to the high probability state (probability variation state) by winning the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot B, the second variable winning device 640 is not operated, so that the configuration does not shift to the high probability state. Further, the jackpot A and the jackpot C are jackpots that can be shifted to a high probability state.

Further, if the execution result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit based on winning the first starting port 64, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in doublet. It is notified that it was a big hit. However, from the third symbol, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, and the player can play the jackpot game while performing the jackpot. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be a jackpot A. Then, from the 14th round, when the game shifts to the next round, the second variable winning device 650 is activated, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the player has a jackpot type of jackpot A. Is recognized, a game ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game can be performed so as to shift to a high probability state after the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot type, it is determined whether or not to give the player a state capable of shifting to a high probability state. Then, the player can play the game so as to decide to shift to the high probability state by making the game ball win the second specific winning opening 650a by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 79 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) for the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 to have a third symbol (first symbol). A third symbol display device 81 is provided, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variations of the special symbol and the second special symbol).

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIG. 4A. Left (left side display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right side) indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state), which is one of the third symbols, in one display area Dm. Three symbol strings in the display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, respectively, on the left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed as the symbol sequences R1, R2, and R3 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the variable display is performed in the same manner.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn is formed on the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol string indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. In the second display area Dn, two types of symbol rows of "○" and "×" as shown in FIG. 4 (b) are displayed in parallel in two rows, and two "○" symbols are left and right. When displayed in a column, it is configured to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol was a hit.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal gaming state), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the second display area Dn. The third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation gaming state) or a time-saving gaming state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

Further, in the jackpot game state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the state displayed before the jackpot game is started, and the display area is based on the fact that the game state is switched after the jackpot game. Is switched.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It provides a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 4A, sub-display regions Ds are formed below the first display region. As shown in FIG. 4B, the reserved symbol "black circle" corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved symbol "black triangle mark" corresponding to the second special symbol are in the sub-display area Ds, respectively. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, respectively, so that four reserved symbols "black circles" are reserved in the sub-table display area Ds. A maximum of four "black triangle marks" are displayed. As will be described in detail later, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are rearranged and displayed in the variation start order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the display contents during the probability change (during the probability change game state) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probability change. When the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 4 (a)), and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is the second display area. It is displayed in Dn. Then, in the first display area Dm, the characters "until the end of the probability change ..." are displayed to notify the shortest time until the end of the probability change game state, and the shortest time remaining until the end of the probability change is displayed below the time. It is digitally displayed in the order of minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.

Here, the shortest time until the end of this probability change is determined by a lottery within that time after determining the time until the jackpot B is started in the first special symbol. It has not yet been decided that the jackpot B will start in the first special symbol (it was determined that the one that won the jackpot B in the pending first special symbol lottery during the change has not been set). In the state, the shortest time is set within the time until the variation of the first special symbol, which has the latest variation start order of the stored first special symbol, is completed. Further, when there is no first special symbol being changed and there is no lottery for the first special symbol held, the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol (3 seconds in the present embodiment) is set. ..

As a result, the probabilistic gaming state is configured to be continued for the player until the jackpot B is started in the first special symbol, but the player can be notified of the remaining time of the probabilistic gaming state. Therefore, the player can feel as if the period of the probabilistic gaming state is set by the time, and before the time elapses, let the jackpot A or the jackpot C win and continue the probabilistic state. You can play the game with the expectation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 5A, the first special symbol being changed and the first special symbol held and stored are all out of the pass / fail judgment result, and the first special symbol having the latest change start order is lost. The time until the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the reserved ball of the symbol is completed is shown by taking the case of 10 minutes 9 seconds 05 milliseconds or more as an example.

Next, FIG. 5B is an example of a display mode in which the game ball enters the first starting port 64 from the state shown in FIG. 5A and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in other cases. It is a schematic diagram shown. The reserved symbol "black circle" of the first special symbol is increased by one and displayed. Here, as for the newly stored reserved ball of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is selected, in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order and the out-of-order (5s) variation pattern is selected. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the time until the variation of the first special symbol currently established is completed is added by 5 seconds. Then, an additional opportunity (in this embodiment, established by winning a prize in the first starting port 64) is established, and 5 seconds is determined from the additional lottery for the notification time (see FIG. 16) described later, and the notification time is set. The characters "5 seconds extension !!" indicating that 5 seconds have been added are displayed, and the time when 5 seconds have been added is also displayed on the digital counter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6 (b), the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not memorized during the probability change, and the fluctuation of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the state of a state. In the configuration of the present embodiment, unless the fluctuation (lottery) is started in the first special symbol, the jackpot B that triggers the end of the probabilistic gaming state is not won, so that the probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued. It becomes a state. However, since the player is notified that the probabilistic game state is time-managed and ends after the specified period has elapsed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. When the state is reached, the subtraction of the digital counter that notifies until the end of the probability change is stopped, and the character "Timer is stopped !!" indicating that the subtraction is stopped is displayed.

As a result, the player can take a break with peace of mind even when he / she wants to take a break in the toilet or the like by interrupting the game. In the present embodiment, the digital counter is set to stop when the fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol both stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is changing. If there is no jackpot A or jackpot B in the hold storage, the subtraction of the digital counter may be stopped based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped. In the present embodiment, the player plays the game mainly paying attention to the fluctuation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Since the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, which is configured to have a small display area, it is difficult for the player to notice the fluctuation display, and the game is configured to play the game without paying attention to the fluctuation. There is. Therefore, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot B, it is difficult for the player to notice that the probabilistic game ends.

In such a configuration, the player pays attention only to the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, and therefore, once the change of the second special symbol is completed, the first one is followed. Even if the special symbol fluctuates, there is no interest and it is recognized that the game can be interrupted by taking a break or the like. Here, if the subtraction of the digital counter is stopped, the player can safely interrupt the game. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the subtraction of the digital counter is not stopped even though there is no holding ball, the player indicates that the period of the probabilistic game is subtracted. It can be recognized and the game can be continued without interruption. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game can be interrupted such as a break.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot B is won in the first special symbol and the probability variation game is completed will be described. In FIG. 6B, the jackpot B is won in the first special symbol, and the combination “◯” of the symbols indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed in parallel in the second display area Dn. After the jackpot B is executed, the normal game state is entered. Therefore, the firing handle 51 is operated so as to launch the game ball to the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the probabilistic game state with the strength to allow the game ball to flow down. The game is played in the state where the firing handle 51 is operated (left-handed game) so that the game ball is fired with the strength of flowing the game ball to the left side of the variable display unit 80 from the state of being (right-handed game) (left-handed game). The text "Please return to left-handed" is displayed to notify the player to do so.

In addition, the remaining time of the digital counter is displayed as 0, and the characters "Probability change end !!" indicating that the probability change game state has ended are displayed. In this case, upon the end of the jackpot B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. Be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a calculation method for determining the remaining maximum period of the probabilistic gaming period in the probabilistic gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. In FIG. 7, three reserved balls of the first special symbol are established, and during the fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern in which the reserved balls 1 and 2 are out of alignment is selected (or is), and the reserved ball 3 Indicates a state in which it is determined that the jackpot B will be won. In this case, when the fluctuation of the holding ball 3 ends, the probability variation gaming state ends. Therefore, the maximum period until the probability variation end time is the time until the retention 3 ends the fluctuation. Therefore, the sum of the remaining fluctuation time during fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in Holds 1 to 3 is determined to be the maximum period until the end of the probability change. Then, when the end of the probability change is determined, the period is set in the digital counter (displayed by adding the difference time to the displayed period).

In the present embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 is suspended up to four times. If a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 while the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the display area of the reserved symbol display area of the lower display area Ds Among the areas where the reserved symbols are not displayed, the "black circle" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side) of the youngest number.

In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640 while the second special symbol is variable, the "black triangle mark" which is the reserved symbol of the second lottery game is the same as when the first starting port 640 is won. Is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the lower display area Ds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of two of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding start-up. Of course, it is also possible to provide each mouth so that the variable display of each lottery result can be displayed at the same time.

When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640, the first starting port switch or the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize.

If either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a jackpot, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the measurement of the variable time is interrupted during the jackpot period. However, the variable display will continue. After that, when the jackpot game is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted, and the fluctuation display is executed in the remaining fluctuation period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. Not limited to this, the fluctuation display during fluctuation may be temporarily stopped, and the remaining fluctuation time may be variablely displayed after the jackpot ends.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, h of the alphabet" in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally long rectangular first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 having a width shorter than that of the first variable winning device 65 are arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the first special symbol becomes a stop symbol of the jackpot. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area (first display area Dm or second display area Dn) of the third symbol display device 81, so that a jackpot occurs. Shown. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). NS.

The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The order in which the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650a are opened and closed (opening round) is determined by the type of jackpot determined. For example, in the case of jackpot A and jackpot C, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the 14th round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 15th round. Further, in the jackpot B, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650a is not opened.

As described above, in the jackpot game, since the specific winning opening opened to the jackpot type is configured to change, the jackpot type can be determined depending on whether or not the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, even if the player is not notified of the jackpot type by a symbol or the like, the player can be made to recognize the jackpot type at the open specific winning opening.

Further, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured as a winning opening that triggers a decision to give the player a probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the probability variation game state is set after the big hit game. In addition, when a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 game balls are used as prize balls for one game ball. It is configured to be paid out by the player.

Specifically, when the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are stopped and displayed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a hit, the opening / closing operation is performed based on the jackpot type. It is set and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have won a prize). Will be done.

The first variable winning device 65 covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second variable winning device 650 covers the second specific winning opening 650a. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing on the side. The first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a. , It operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win a prize in any of the winning openings 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a first starting port 64 (also referred to as a left first starting port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. The left first starting port 64 has an opening on the upper surface having a size capable of allowing one game ball to enter, and two nails are slightly larger than the diameter of the two game balls at the opposite positions of the opening. They are arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game game to the left first starting port 64 (for example, the number of game balls winning to the left first starting port 64 when 250 game balls are launched). It is configured so that the ratio of) can be changed.

Further, in the right side region of the variable display unit 80, a second starting port 640 and a first starting port 64 (also referred to as a right side first starting port 64) are arranged in parallel vertically. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game plate 60 into which one game ball can enter. An ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 is arranged on the front surface side (opposing surface) of the opening. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and is pivotally supported on one end side so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a hit, the game ball is played for a predetermined number of times (once or twice in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment). Is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment) in a direction (a direction away from the opening) so that the can be guided to the second starting port 640. The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In the normal state (other than when the second symbol hits), the opening of the second starting port 640a is maintained in a closed state (standing up in the vertical direction).

Further, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640 as shown in FIG. When the normal electric accessory 640a is open (tilted to the horizontal direction), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting port 64. With this configuration, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure the game ball in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first starting port 64.

In this embodiment, when the gaming states are the high probability state (probability variation state) and the time-saving gaming state, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit is high. Further, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the player fires the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and wins the gaming ball in the first starting port 64 on the left side. Perform the game to make it. Then, the third symbol becomes a hit, and when the game shifts to the probabilistic game or the time-saving game, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit increases. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is likely to be a hit. Has been done. Therefore, the player executes the game by firing the game ball so as to pass through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state is high, it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, while the winning in the right first starting port 64 is reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the second special symbol than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given a probability change after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are likely to be given a time-saving game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game (low probability game state). It is configured so that a jackpot (which is difficult to give a probabilistic game) is given.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when a big hit is made, a big hit is given so that a probabilistic game is easily given after the big hit game at 100%. That is, the person who wins the second special symbol is more likely to be given the probabilistic game state.

Although the details will be described later, a probabilistic game is given when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a which is opened and closed during the jackpot game. The above-mentioned jackpot that is likely to be given a probability variation refers to a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the jackpot game and the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is selected, it is possible to set a state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. good. For example, by providing a meandering path or the like between the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the game ball that did not enter the first specific winning opening 65a flows down to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is configured that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is required for the operation. Then, by varying the time (so-called interval time) from the closing of the first specific winning opening 65a to the opening of the second specific winning opening 650a, the first specific winning opening 65a to the second specific winning opening 650a are changed. It is sufficient to set the case where the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a is completed and the case where the opening / closing operation is not completed within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) required for flowing down to.

Further, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is opened, the distance between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more and less than two game balls. It is an interval of. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the right first starting port 64 due to the nails arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, the game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail arranged above the opening of the right first starting port 64. It is configured at intervals (less than one game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the windmill as it is. That is, when winning a prize in the right first starting port 64, it is configured so as to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a state of standing upright in the vertical direction).

Further, during the probabilistic change state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set as short as 3 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is configured to be in the open state frequently. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first starting port 640a during the probability change state. Therefore, when the probabilistic state is reached, the number of times the probabilistic state continues can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game.

In the present embodiment, in the open state of the normal electric accessory 640a, the right first starting port 64 is not won, but the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the right first starting. The interval may be set so that the opening 64 can be won, and the ratio may be reduced so that the right first starting port 64 can be won.

Further, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged immediately below the first variable winning device 65 on the lower right side of the game area. The first variable winning device 65 is configured by closing the first specific winning opening 65a, which is a horizontally long opening through which a game ball can enter, by a door member that normally prevents the game ball from entering. There is. Then, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, the door member rotates around the lower end as a rotation axis to a position perpendicular to the game plate 60, and the door member receives the flowing game ball. It is configured to guide the inside of the first specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged so that the second specific winning opening 650a, which is an opening having a narrower width than the first variable winning device, is a door member and normally restricts the entry of a game ball. Has been done. Then, when the special symbol is a big hit, the door member is configured to rotate to a position perpendicular to the game plate 60 with the lower both ends as rotation axes to receive the flowing game ball. In addition, when the game ball wins the second specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the probabilistic state is set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot A given when the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit and the jackpot C given when the second special symbol (special figure 2) becomes a big hit. When and is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1st round (round) to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated only in the 15th round.

On the other hand, in the jackpot B given when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the first variable winning device 65 operates and the second variable winning device 650 operates from the 1st round to the 14th round. Since there is no such thing, the second specific winning opening 650a is not given an opportunity to win a prize, and it is difficult to give a probabilistic state.

In the present embodiment, the probability change state is given by the game ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot may be generated based on a game ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a. Specifically, when a small hit is obtained as a result of a lottery of a special symbol, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed, and the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. 1 It is configured to open and close the specific winning opening 65a (a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer may be used).

In the present embodiment, in the low-probability gaming state, it is prohibited to play the game in the right-handed game, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 640 in the low-probability gaming state, an abnormal process is executed, and the third An alarm display "Please play left-handed" is displayed on the symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in the low-probability game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal may be output to the hall computer or the like. You may.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 9) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display unit 88), and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 in which the counter value is stored for the winning of the first starting port 64. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a total of a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and various settings for variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol. And control processing is executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and various settings and control processes for variable display of the second special symbol are performed. Is executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is the first starting port 64 or When the second starting port 640 is won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting port is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the winning starting port is won. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the above. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four may be used for each, and the upper limit value may be set. You may not make a profit.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. The special hit random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for the first start port 64 and the second start port 640.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (in this embodiment, "7" at the time of low probability and "0-9" at the time of high probability), it is determined as a big hit.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hits) that become big hits is 1 at low probability, the value "7" is 10, and the value "0-9" is big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 (starting winning). At the timing of the winning, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation display effect. The type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 10A, various tables are stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a, and FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol. The jackpot A is a jackpot composed of 15Rs (rounds), and the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to the 14th R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated at the 15th R. Here, the second variable winning device 650 is activated (opened) so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the jackpot A The game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability change state. As a result, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot type to which a probabilistic game can be given. The jackpot A is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 64, and when the jackpot is hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first starting port). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be one of 0 to 49 (acquired at the time of entering the ball 64).

Further, the jackpot B is a jackpot type composed of 14Rs, and the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1st round to the 14th rounds to execute the jackpot game. Therefore, since the second variable winning device 650 is not operated, the probability change state is not set after the end of the jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot type to which the probability variation state is not given. The jackpot B is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 64, and when the jackpot is hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first starting port). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be one of 50 to 99 (acquired at the time of entering the ball 64).

The jackpot C is a jackpot of 15R like the jackpot A, and the first variable winning device 65 operates from the 1Rth to the 14th Rth, and the second variable winning device 650 operates at the 15th Rth. As a result, the jackpot C becomes a jackpot type in which a probability change state can be set after the jackpot game. The jackpot C is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 640, and when a jackpot is obtained, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired (the first starting port). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be one of 0 to 99 (acquired at the time of entering the ball 64). That is, in the second special symbol lottery, when a big hit is made, the big hit C is always determined and executed.

In this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on entering the ball into the first starting port 64, when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are selected, respectively, with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on entering the second starting port 64, the jackpot C is selected with a 100% probability when it becomes a jackpot. Therefore, the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. As a result, the player feels that it is more advantageous to execute the lottery with the second special symbol than with the first special symbol. Can be done.

As described above, in the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C), the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 10C, the value "0 to 49" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot A, and the value "50 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 corresponds to the jackpot B. The value "0 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot C.

When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored is stored. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", the jackpot A is determined if it is the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is determined if it is the second special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0.

The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

11A to 11B show a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is a schematic diagram. The variation pattern selected in the normal gaming state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described.

In FIG. 11A, a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect. It is a deviation (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (normal) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, each fluctuation pattern type is assigned according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, with respect to the value "0 to 100" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the third symbol is stopped in the display mode of deviation, which is composed of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds (the third symbol is not displayed in the reach display mode). The variation pattern of the display mode) is set. For "101 to 160", a fluctuation pattern of normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set. Further, for "161 to 198", a fluctuation pattern of super reach composed of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set. It should be noted that the fluctuation patterns selected here are fluctuation patterns in which the hit / fail determination result is out of order.

In this way, when the game state is the normal game state and the hit / fail judgment result is out of order, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (5 seconds), is selected at a rate of about 50%. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is bored early because the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time is selected and the game is delayed even though the hit / fail judgment result is wrong. Further, by sharing the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed evenly.

FIG. 11B shows a hit (normal) common variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the hit / fail determination result is a hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the selection table 202d schematically. In this hit (normal) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set for the value “0 to 10” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For "11 to 150", a fluctuation pattern of super reach composed of a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set. For "151 to 198", a fluctuation pattern composed of a fluctuation pattern for 60 seconds is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 (c) to 12 (b), when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern selection of the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol Table 202d will be described. As the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected in the time saving game state is set, the hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection referred to when the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit. Table 202d (FIG. 11 (c)) and the deviation (time reduction) that is referred to when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviation. The deviation (time reduction) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12B), which is referred to when the lottery result is deviation, is set respectively.

FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection table 202d. The hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection table 202d is a variation pattern selection table selected when the hit / fail determination result in the time saving gaming state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a hit. In this hit (time saving) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set for the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the game state is the time saving state, if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that is a hit in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (5 seconds), is selected. It is possible to shift to a jackpot game. Here, the details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol has started the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, the fluctuation starts later. In the special symbol to be played, it is controlled so as to forcibly result in a hit / fail judgment result. Therefore, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily delayed by selecting a relatively short fluctuation time.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the variable display that becomes a big hit does not fluctuate at the same time, but the variation display that becomes a big hit can be performed at the same time. When configured, the variation display time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol is used. The fluctuation time that becomes the jackpot of the symbol may be configured so that a fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol, which may determine the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and in the meantime, the second special. A jackpot C can be given to the player by making a jackpot with a symbol. In this case, if a big hit is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is given, and the probability variation game state is determined immediately after the probability variation game state is set, and the probability variation game state ends in a short period of time. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described configuration in which the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the hit / fail judgment result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of the hit / fail judgment result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be used during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) can be reduced, and the number of lottery times for the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. If the number of time reductions is set to be until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed 100 times in succession due to the deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the time-saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12A, it is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is out of order is set. The deviation (time saving) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (time saving) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the deviation (time reduction) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach whose fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the fluctuation time are shown. The fluctuation pattern of the special reach configured for 30 seconds and the semi-long fluctuation pattern configured for the fluctuation time of 300 seconds are set by allocating the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 respectively. Specifically, the deviation pattern is set for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 50", and the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is set for "51 to 100". , "101-169" are set with special reach fluctuation patterns, and "170-198" are set with semi-long fluctuation patterns.

Here, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set high and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 640a is long until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times. (Normally 0.2 seconds is extended to 1 second), and the number of times of opening is large (normally once is set to 2 times). As a result, as a player, the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player (the jackpot C that can give the probabilistic game state in the case of a jackpot is always determined) is displayed in a variable manner as many times as possible. Expect to play a game. Therefore, in the deviation (time reduction) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the special reach and semi-long fluctuation patterns having a relatively long fluctuation time are selected from the deviation (time reduction) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d described later. It is set easily.

Therefore, there are many chances that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol having a long fluctuation time is selected, and the number of times that the first special symbol is changed in the time-saving gaming state can be reduced. Therefore, when a big hit is made during the time-saving game state, the big hit C can be easily given to the player.

In the semi-long fluctuation pattern, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed for 300 seconds, and then is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a deviation. In addition, the second special symbol, which will be described later, is configured so that if the hit / fail judgment result is wrong during the time reduction, the deviation pattern composed of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds can be easily selected. You can start 60 fluctuations with a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to perform fluctuations (lottery) in the second special symbol during more time-saving games.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the semi-long is set to 300 seconds, but the fluctuation time is not limited to 300 seconds, and may be configured by a fluctuation time in which the second special symbol can fluctuate by a maximum of the number of time reductions or more in the deviation pattern. Further, it may be configured to set a fluctuation pattern of a longer fluctuation time separately from the semi-long.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12 (b), the deviation (time reduction) special figure 2 variation pattern selection in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol in the time reduction game state is deviation is set is set. Table 202d will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (time saving) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the time-saving game state, the deviation variation pattern of the second special symbol is composed of a deviation variation pattern composed of a variation time of 5 seconds and a variation time of 10 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is set respectively. "0 to 180" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the deviation pattern, and "181 to 198" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. It is set.

As a result, in the time-saving game state, if the deviation pattern is out of order with a probability of 181/199 and the hit / fail determination result is out of the second special symbol, it is selected. Therefore, since the variation of the second special symbol can be executed in a short time, more lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more advantageous lottery opportunities by utilizing the time-saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 (c) to 13 (c), a variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state will be described.

FIG. 12C is a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, which is a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation game state is deviation. It is 202d. FIG. 12 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 whose fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the fluctuation time are The fluctuation pattern of the long reach 2 composed of 100 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the long reach 3 composed of the fluctuation time of 500 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the long reach 4 composed of the fluctuation time of 1000 seconds, respectively. , It is set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 10", and the fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 is set to "11 to 120". The fluctuation pattern of long reach 2 is set for "121 to 149", the fluctuation pattern of long reach 3 is set for "150 to 189", and the fluctuation pattern of long reach 3 is set for "190 to 198". The fluctuation pattern of the long reach 4 is set.

As described above, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, the variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected at a ratio of 188/199. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state, the variation display of the first special symbol makes it easy to select a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (30 seconds or more), and the number of variations of the first special symbol decreases. Further, as will be described later, in the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is wrong is set so that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected at a ratio of 151/199. It is set so that an extremely short fluctuation time is selected as compared with the first special symbol.

Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is larger than that of the first special symbol. Further, in the probabilistic game state, the normal electric accessory 640a is set to be easily operated at the second start port 640, which triggers the start of fluctuation (lottery execution) of the second special symbol, so that the game ball is set to the first. It is configured to be easier to enter than the starting port 64. As a result, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol can be increased more than that of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities for fluctuation (lottery) in the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state can be given to the player for a longer period of time.

With reference to FIG. 13 (a), the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation which is the variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the variation pattern when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation game state is a hit. The pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In this hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a special 1 variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds and a special 2 variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds are displayed as variation type counters, respectively. It is set according to the value of CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of special 1 is set for the value "0 to 190" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of special 2 is set for "191 to 198".

As described above, in the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the probabilistic game state, either the fluctuation time of 3 seconds or the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. Since it is mainly configured so that the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected, when the jackpot B is determined by using this 3 seconds, the ending of the probability variation period indicating the end of the probability variation game state. The display mode is displayed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of special 2 is selected and the jackpot B is determined, the effect that the probability variation period remains for a maximum of 30 seconds remaining is executed. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the special 2, when the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds, the ending effect similar to the fluctuation pattern of the special 1 may be executed.

Further, when the fluctuation patterns of Special 1 and Special 2 are selected and the jackpot A is determined, the effect indicating that the probabilistic game state continues is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, an effect of stopping the counter indicating the remaining time of the probability variation period shown in FIG. 5A is executed, or an effect of adding so that the remaining time of the probability variation period does not become 0 seconds is executed. Further, once the ending is executed and the end of the probability change period is notified, a resurrection effect may be executed to show the player that the probability change period has been set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13 (b), the deviation (probability variation) of the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state is deviation is set. ) Special FIG. 2 The variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation 1 composed of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and the fluctuation pattern of the deviation 2 composed of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds are shown. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach composed of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds are set corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of deviation 1 is set for the value "0 to 150" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern of deviation 2 is set for "151 to 170", and "171 to 170". A normal reach variation pattern is set for "190", and a super reach variation pattern is set for "191 to 198".

In this way, as the fluctuation pattern selected when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state is wrong, the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and a deviation of 1 is selected at a rate of 151/199. Will be done. Therefore, in the second special symbol, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the fluctuation pattern having an extremely short fluctuation time as compared with the first special symbol is selected, so that the fluctuation pattern is selected as compared with the first special symbol. The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of lottery with the second special symbol, and it is possible to increase the chances that the player is given the jackpot C. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the period in which the jackpot C is continuously determined and the probabilistic gaming state is continuously granted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13 (c), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state is a hit is set is the hit (probability variation). ) Special FIG. 2 The variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. In the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach composed of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time of 30 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the special reach composed of is set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is special for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 150", the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is special for "151 to 190", and the fluctuation pattern is special for "191 to 198". Reach fluctuation patterns are set respectively.

In this way, when the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is a hit in the probabilistic game state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds or more is selected. When the second special symbol is a hit, the jackpot C to which the probability variation game state can be given is always determined after the jackpot game, so the probability variation using the fluctuation time set by the variation pattern is used. It is possible to perform various notification effects during the period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, an effect such as temporarily stopping the counter indicating the remaining time (period) of the probability variation period or adding a time of 10 seconds or more is executed. NS. Here, if it is a notification effect indicating that the probabilistic gaming state is continued for a long time, it can be appropriately executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variable at the same time, and when one of them starts to change to be a big hit, the other special symbol is used. It is configured to start the variable display that is forcibly off. In this configuration, when a big hit is made between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the type of big hit that can be given the probabilistic game state is set to be changed. By setting a difference between advantages and disadvantages for the player in the lottery between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the deviation time of the special symbol, which is disadvantageous, can be easily set for a long period of time. By configuring so as to execute many lottery in a short time with a special symbol which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to give the player more advantageous lottery.

In addition, when the probabilistic game state is reached, one special symbol (the first special symbol in the present embodiment) is set to the jackpot type to which the normal game state is given, and the other special symbol (the present implementation) is set. In the form, the second special symbol) is set so that the probabilistic game state is always set, so that the period during which the deviation change is executed in the special symbol to which the normal game state is given is probable. It is possible to notify the player as the period during which the game state continues.

Further, is the reserved ball for which the jackpot B (the jackpot type to which the normal game state is given) determined is stored in the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a described later? Is determined, the time until the jackpot B stops fluctuating is set as the maximum remaining period of the probability variation period, and the remaining period of the probability variation can be notified to the player within the time within the maximum remaining period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the probability change period is set in advance. In addition, by configuring the notification effect of the remaining time of the probability variation period to be linked with the actual time and subtracted, the player can start fluctuating the special symbol quickly, and in a high probability state advantageous to the player. I can get excited trying to run many lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game effect. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the probabilistic gaming state will continue for a long time by performing an effect of gradually adding the remaining time of the probabilistic period and an effect of stopping the subtraction of the remaining time of the probabilistic period. In addition to the big hit, it is possible to produce a production that gives the player expectations.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the rough fluctuation pattern content, reach, non-reach, etc., determines the fluctuation time, and determines the detailed fluctuation pattern content by voice. It is configured to be determined by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the details of the fluctuation pattern (reach display content, etc.). Alternatively, the main control device 110 may be configured to execute the determination control for the fluctuation pattern by the voice lamp control device 113 or another control device without determining the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, "reach" means that there are many different production contents in each reach. For example, in super reach, a reach that changes the rear image quickly and displays it, or a character is suddenly displayed. There are reach to be displayed, etc., and in addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as one with a notice effect before the start of the variable display and one with a big hit effect in the re-variable display.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the ordinary symbol is set by the random number table 202c (FIG. 10 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the random number table 202c (FIG. 10 (d)) per normal symbol, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol.

Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate). .. The number of random number values to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high-probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state, if the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability game state, the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 value. Is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display unit 88 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the normal electric accessory 640a is displayed. When the blade 640a is in the normal gaming state, the opening operation for a predetermined time (1.2s in the present embodiment) is performed once, and in the high probability gaming state, the opening operation for a predetermined time (1s in the present embodiment) is performed twice. Will be done. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, the update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the counter value is not stored. A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, and is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variablely displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the corresponding hold number (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) by the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to on, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random value is stopped, or the hold is exhausted. If the data is shifted to the hold area, it will be set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Judgment as to whether or not data is stored in the hold area or whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed depending on which hold area or whether or not the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery By setting various counters dedicated to each game (second special symbol) and changing the update triggers and initial values of various counters between the first lottery game and the second lottery game, they are updated with different values. Of course, it may be composed of the counter values to be generated.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter values are acquired at the same opportunity, the counter values of different values can be acquired. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and a problem that the result of determining whether or not the result is synchronized.

In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected from the common fluctuation pattern table, the trouble that the selected fluctuation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the stored data in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (a RAM having a small storage area or the like is used) can be obtained.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 40) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 39) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol holding ball number. Counter 203e, 2nd special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time saving counter 203k, jackpot post-hit state area , Big hit flag 203o, Special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, Special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, Sort hold storage area 203t, Status setting area 203u, Abnormality It has at least a monitoring flag 203v and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning a prize in the first starting port 64 up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). be. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as those of the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. ..

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are for counters when a start winning prize is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), it acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and obtains the first value. The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the variable type counter storage area 203a4, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each area (not shown) is similarly stored.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-mentioned first process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to one start prize among the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The data is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning of the mouth 64 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 40, S1242) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol hold ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is the first when the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, respectively. 1 The data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is subjected to the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 22, S203) or the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 26, S203). Referencing in S206), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a fluctuation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 g allows the game ball to pass through the normal symbol start port 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, “starting prize”). The variation display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation display effect performed by the second symbol display unit 88 and the second symbol display device 88 of the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 40, S1242) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIG. 35, S1169).

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored when the start winning prize is detected in the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the normal hit random number counter C4 is used from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, normal symbol flag 203j) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting port 67 (starting prize) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of being digested earlier. Will be done.

Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored, and the winning lottery of the normal symbol or the first This is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, it executes a winning lottery, a display setting of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88, and the like. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per normal hit) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to the execution area 203i. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored and held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. Further, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next hold area (the hold area corresponding to the hold number in which the hold is exhausted and the hold number is reduced by one), the hold area before the shift is used. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to off, while the shifted and stored normal symbol flag 203j in the hold area is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the fluctuation, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to off.

The time saving counter 203k is a counter area in which the time saving number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of time reductions is set, the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability is set in the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol until the number of time reductions is set to 0. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a have a longer opening time than the normal gaming state (1s in this embodiment). The opening operation is repeated twice. This gaming state is hereinafter referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

The time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates and stops displaying, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time saving game state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol When a random number table per ordinary symbol for a low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set and a symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a are opened.

The jackpot post-hit state area 203m is a storage area in which the gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) set when the jackpot is executed is stored. In the initial setting, the data corresponding to the time-saving game state is stored, and the data corresponding to the probabilistic game state is stored based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a during the jackpot game. NS. As a result, even if the jackpot A or C that allows the game ball to enter the second specific entry port 650a is executed, the data set in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m becomes the data corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. 2 When the game ball enters the specific entry port 650a, the data corresponding to the probabilistic game state is set (overwritten). As a result, unless the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a, the configuration does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state, and whether or not the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a. The player can expect to play the game.

The jackpot flag 203o is turned on when the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a hit at the start of fluctuation based on winning the first start port 64 or the second start port 640. This is the flag to be set. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. It is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203o on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203o for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203o is set as off.

Here, since the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be on at the start of fluctuation. If so, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203o is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a loss. As a result, it is possible to process the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variable display that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is not started in the other, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an independent jackpot flag is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute the variable display that becomes a big hit at the same time. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display that becomes the jackpot B is started in the first special symbol during the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time is set long and the fluctuation is short in the second special symbol. By making it easy to draw lots by time, it is possible to make it easy to make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit B is started. Therefore, the player is informed of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ends), and the player is hurriedly won the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to perform an effect of playing a game in an attempt to make it play. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S1005 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S613 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 25, S204).

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1012 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207).

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S507 in FIG. 24). After that, in the process of S602 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S907 in FIG. 28). After that, in the process of S1002 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIGS. 29, S207), the counter value (1 by 1 in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed variation time is subtracted and updated.

The sort hold storage area 203t is the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of the hold areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

FIG. 17A is a diagram schematically showing the sort hold storage area 203t. The sort hold storage area 203t corresponds to a hold data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each hold number of hold areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. It is composed of a changing data storage area in which each determination data is stored.

In each of the pending data holding areas 1 to 8, the hit / fail judgment result storage area 203t1, the jackpot type storage area 203t2, the variation pattern type storage area 203t3, the variation order storage area 203t4, the variation start time storage area 203t5, and the look-ahead probability variation flag 203t6 Are provided respectively. The holding areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the holding area 1 in the order in which the holding balls are established (the overall formation order in which the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are combined). That is, the holding areas 1 to 8 indicate the order in which the holding balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol.

In the variable display data storage area, a hit / fail judgment result storage area 203t1, a jackpot type storage area 203t2, a fluctuation pattern storage area 203t3, and a look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Has been done.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the hit / fail determination result storage area 203t1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of preliminarily determining the validity of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

The jackpot type storage area 203t2 is set in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203t3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead processing (FIGS. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is stored. This fluctuation pattern is data that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the fluctuation pattern, and the data in the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data to identify whether it is the data of.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the variable display order storage area 203t4 has the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area in which the actual variation display start order in the determined reservation areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in. Specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored reserved balls and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each reserved ball previously stored.

The variation start time storage area 203t5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 calculated based on the various data stored in the variable display actually starts is stored. When the fluctuation display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated at any time by another process (S112) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The look-ahead probability change flag storage area 203t6 is turned on when it is determined in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1133) described later that the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is jackpot A or jackpot C. It is a storage area that is set to and stored. Further, the look-ahead probability change flag storage area 203t6 is set to off because every time the data is shifted to a higher holding area and stored, all the areas before the shift are cleared to 0. That is, the look-ahead probability change flag storage area 203u6 once set to on is shifted to the changing data storage area, and is set to off by overwriting (shifting) new data in the changing data storage area. .. Further, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial value is set to off.

When the power is cut off in the pachinko machine 10, each data in the sort hold storage area 203t is backed up and stored in the backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The state setting area 203u is a storage area in which the current gaming state is stored. In the present embodiment, the game state after the big hit is switched by setting the data corresponding to the game state in the state setting area 203u based on the data stored in the state setting area 203m after the big hit after the big hit game. Set. Further, in the time-saving game state, when the time-saving number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) is executed, the data corresponding to the normal game state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the game state is changed. It shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. In the initialized state, data corresponding to the normal gaming state is set.

The abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game by the correct game method according to the current game state.

It is correct to execute the right-handed game in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (except during the big hit game). In this case, the lottery is usually executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but during the period when the game is executed only with the second special symbol, the game is played in an illegal manner. There is a risk of doing. Therefore, this abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. As will be described later, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, the abnormality monitoring counter (not shown) measures the period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to ON for a predetermined time (in the present embodiment). , 20 seconds) or more, an abnormality notification (displaying a voice and a warning image) is executed.

Also, in the normal game state, it is the correct game method to play the game by hitting left, but when the game ball enters the normal symbol start port 67, which should only enter by hitting right, the normal symbol fluctuates. When it is determined, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to on, and the abnormality notification is executed.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In this way, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 and a reserved ball is generated, each of the reserved balls is formed in the order in which the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are combined. Various determination data of the reserved ball is stored. Therefore, since the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement holding storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113 establishes a hold in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined based on the winning command. It is possible to generate a command to be output to the display control device 114 so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order in which the hold is established by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the winning command is generated based on the variable display start order, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the command. Based on the winning command, the order in which each hold is established and the actual order in which the variable display is started can be determined.

In addition, since the fluctuation start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and the time is managed (updated according to the passage of time), the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data can be easily performed. It can be determined.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display unit 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it displays in the order of winning displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order.

Further, the vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the game state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning opening from being intentionally won. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the addition time selection table 222b are set in the ROM 222.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The variation pattern selection table 222a has a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation) corresponding to the variation time and the rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents from reach A to D, which are composed of the same time and the same determination result.

The addition time selection table 222b is for determining the addition time of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the addition time (the extended display time shown in FIG. 5B) with respect to the remaining time of the probability variation period. It is a data table. In the addition time selection table 222b, the addition time is set corresponding to each addition time. The maximum time for the addition time is the period until the variable display that becomes the jackpot B is started. If the selected addition time exceeds the maximum time, it is set in the addition time selection table 222b. It is controlled so that the larger value within the maximum time is selected from the added times.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the jackpot B starts is set, but the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the jackpot B stops is the maximum time. It may be configured to be configured as.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d1, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1, a secondary special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2, and a second special symbol. Hold ball number counter 223d1, slave special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2, slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, slave special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, probability variation upper limit storage area 223i, At least a probability variation period storage area 223j, a subordinate sort hold storage area 223k, an update stop flag 223m, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The outer 1 special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is the first special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a variable display (dynamic display) of a symbol, and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to (FIG. 46, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1612).

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to (FIG. 46, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1617).

The secondary special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received ((not shown). FIG. 46, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The secondary special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is a flag indicating the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p in the main control device 110. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 can be discriminated by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 is the second special performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a variable display (dynamic display) of a symbol, and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 46). , S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is a flag indicating the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q in the main control device 110. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 can be discriminated by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223h, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is a storage area in which the time until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol is started is stored. If the reserved ball that is the jackpot B is not stored in the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the time until the last reserved ball of the stored reserved ball of the first special symbol is changed is completed. It is stored in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k has the same data as the sort hold storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Is a storage area stored based on a winning command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. The subordinate sort hold storage area 223k stores the hold area of the hold data from the hold area 1 to the hold area 8 and various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81. It is composed of a storage area for data during variable display. Each holding area has a hit / fail judgment result storage area 223k1, a jackpot type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a read-ahead probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a sort flag 223k7. Is stored in the corresponding hold area, and each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding holding area. Further, every time a display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of a special symbol is generated, the data of the hold area of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is shifted to the previous hold area and stored. The hold data in the hold area 1 is stored in the storage area of the changing data of the first special symbol in the case of the first special symbol, and in the case of the second special symbol, the changing data of the second special symbol. Each is shifted to the storage area and stored.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the hit / fail determination result storage area 223k1 has the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of preliminarily determining the validity of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the winning / failing judgment result extracted from the winning command is the winning / failing judgment result storage area of any of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearranged holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110). It is stored in 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is set in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This fluctuation pattern is data that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the fluctuation pattern, and the data in the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data to identify whether it is the data of.

The variable order storage area 223k4 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1114). It is a storage area in which the actual variation display start order in the determined hold areas 1 to 8 is extracted from the received winning command based on various stored data and stored.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area in which the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 calculated based on various data stored in is actually started to be variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. .. When the variable display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated at any time in the hold number display process (FIG. 45, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 45, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. NS.

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start the variable display, but the command is not limited to this and is until the variable starts. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol during fluctuation (number of interrupts, etc.)) and the fluctuation display start. It may be a command corresponding to the time until it becomes.

The pre-reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to on and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

The sort flag 223k7 indicates that the player has requested the rearrangement of the hold symbol display by operating the frame button 22 (the hold symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). It is a flag.

In this way, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 and a holding ball is generated, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are based on the data extracted from the winning command. Various determination data of each holding ball are stored according to the formation order of the holding balls including the above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the hold symbol in the order in which the hold is established by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the data of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. A command to output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order in which the hold is established by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, based on the winning command, the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110, and the hold data is changed (new hold is established, etc.). However, the data can be sequentially updated in synchronization.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). It has a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores each data in the sort hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, the backed up data of the sort hold storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and the corresponding hold areas of the sort hold storage area 203u or changing. It is stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 40), the backed up data is read and stored based on the sort hold storage area 203u in the same manner as the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127). By generating all the winning commands and outputting them to the voice lamp control device 113, the data synchronized with the same sort hold storage area 203u is set in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k.

Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 40), by transmitting a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data of the sort hold storage area 203u and the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k can be stored even when recovering from a power failure. The configuration for synchronization has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 backs up each data of the slave sorting hold storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Of course, it may be configured to be stored as.

In the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects the winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and executes control processing such as various lottery such as selection of a winning or fluctuating pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting as in the present embodiment is sub-controlled. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the operation by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control board of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is covered with a box called a board box, which is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By doing so, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. ..

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231 and the ROM 234 and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. Further, the ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 64, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired, and after the lottery and the fluctuation pattern and the like are determined based on the acquired counter values, the game ball is determined. The variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640, each counter value (C1) is displayed for the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery game machine, as in the case where the first starting port 64 is won. ~ C3 and CS1) are acquired, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to enable variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, among the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the 7-segment LED on the left side executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the 7 on the right side. In the segment LED, the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 4A, variable display corresponding to the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is executed in the display area Dm, and the upper right display area Dn In a simple display mode (◯ or ×), a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. ..

When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 while the first special symbol is variablely displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning is obtained. The first lottery game in which the lottery result of) is variablely displayed is not immediately executed, and each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an embodiment (for example, one) indicating the number of reserved first special symbols "1" of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The light emitting diode is lit in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of reserved balls is added by 1).

When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 is the winning, and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) can be identified.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the holding information such as the number of holdings and the information about the winning start port from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device. A process of displaying the reserved symbol in the corresponding reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds in 81 is executed. As shown in FIG. 4 (b), if the reserved symbol corresponds to the reserved information of the first special symbol (first starting port 64), the "black circle" is the second special symbol (the second special symbol). 2 If it is a hold symbol corresponding to the hold information of the start port 640), a "black triangle mark" is displayed for each hold information (one hold symbol for each hold).

Similarly, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the remaining variable time is set), when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area is obtained. It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are combined. One example shown in FIG. 18 will be specifically described. This means that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol has a fluctuation time of 10 s remaining, and the second special symbol has a fluctuation time of 5 s remaining. Shown. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol "holding information" indicating that the reserved symbol display area Ds1 is the holding information of the second special symbol (holding information based on the winning of the second starting port 640). The reserved symbol "black circle" indicating that the reserved symbol display area Ds2 is the reserved information of the first special symbol is the reserved information of the second special symbol in the reserved symbol display area Ds3. The reserved symbol "black triangle mark" indicating that the reserved symbol is the reserved information of the first special symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4, respectively. In this case, it is shown that the order in which the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are won is in the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 and the reserved symbol display area Ds4 in the order of earliest.

That is, after the game ball wins in the second starting opening 640, the first starting opening 64 wins, then the second starting opening 640 wins, and then the first starting opening 64 wins the game. Indicates that the ball has won a prize.

As shown in FIG. 18, in each hold data, the change time of the change pattern selected when the hold starts to change is predicted and stored in advance (the type of change pattern to be determined is stored). Has been). Then, since the hold of the second special symbol is stored in the first prize order (corresponding to the hold area 1 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the rest of the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time (5s) elapses, the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. Further, since the hold of the first special symbol is stored in the second prize order (corresponding to the hold area 2 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the rest of the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation time (10s) elapses, the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the hold of the second special symbol is stored in the third prize order (corresponding to the hold area 3 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner When the fluctuation time (40s) of the reserved data stored first in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (5s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the hold of the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth prize order (corresponding to the hold area 4 in the sort hold storage area 203u), the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner When the fluctuation time (10s) of the reserved data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

In this way, in the sort hold storage area 203u, the variable display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the order of establishment (winning), and the variable display start time is calculated based on the variable display start time. The variable display order is assigned in the order of earliest.

When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 holds the first special symbol, which is the fourth in the winning order, as shown in the rearranged display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged from the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the winning order (the fourth reserved symbol display in the winning order is interrupted before the reserved symbol display in the third winning order).

FIG. 19 shows that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 31) when the game ball wins the first start port 64 1 s after the state of FIG. 33, S1114) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved symbols.

Since FIG. 19 shows a state after 1 s from FIG. 18, the first special symbol in the variable display has a remaining fluctuation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining fluctuation time of 4 s. In addition, the fluctuation start time of each hold area of the sort hold storage area 203u is also updated.

The newly established first start port 64 (first special symbol) is held in the fifth winning order, and in the sort hold storage area 203u, each data is stored in the hold area 5. First, the same as the newly memorized first special symbol, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display and the holding fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the winning orders 2 and 4, are newly added. The time for the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) to start the variable display is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 19, the rearranged order (variable display start order) is rearranged in the order in which the variable display starts, based on the variable display start time of each holding area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the rearranged display mode of FIG. 19, the fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed in the winning order. Is rearranged from the 3rd reserved symbol display in the winning order (the 4th and 5th reserved symbol display in the winning order is interrupted before the 3rd reserved symbol display in the winning order).

In this way, each time a hold occurs, the variation display start time is calculated and the sort order is determined, so that the player can perform an operation for requesting the sort (operation of the frame button 22). In that case, it is possible to promptly display the reserved symbol display after sorting.

Further, the fluctuation patterns of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tend to be longer than the fluctuation patterns selected when the fluctuation time is off. As shown in FIG. 19, the first hold in the winning order has a long fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that was established after that has a later variation display start time than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later, and when rearranged, a longer variation time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display, the types (differences between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the reserved symbol whose long fluctuation time is selected are collectively displayed. Therefore, the larger the number of reserved symbol displays that are displayed by interrupting the reserved symbol display area that follows the reserved symbol display, the more the player has the expectation of a big hit for the previous reserved symbol display. Sorting can be done with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the interest in the game increases, and the game can be continued without getting tired of it.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (FIG. 40) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 41, S1250) that is executed after the start-up process, and periodically (the present embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 40) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) will be described.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is provided in the RAM 203. It is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for sending commands. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. Determines if a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding counter buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values become the maximum values (399, 99, 239, respectively in this embodiment). When it reaches, it clears to 0 respectively. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Then, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

After the start winning process (S108) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67, is executed (S109), and then the normal symbol start port 67 is executed. (S110), a through-gate process is executed for the passage of the game ball. The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the details of the through gate processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Next, the fluctuation monitoring process is executed (S111), and the fraud monitoring process is executed (S112). The details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, and the details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

When the process of S112 is completed, the launch control process for executing the control related to the launch of the game ball is executed (S113), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S114), and the timer interrupt process is completed. do. The firing control process (S113) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S107). The special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 21, S107) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In the embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 21, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being achieved (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. And the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display when the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the jackpot and the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed. Is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variation display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the fluctuation pattern selection process based on the hold data are executed. ..

After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIGS. 29, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204), the fluctuation of the regulation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When time has passed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the judgment result of the second lottery game and the variable display of the first special symbol with the symbol showing the jackpot are stopped, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed. If so, the process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol during the variable display is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in the variation (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). The second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is executed, but if it is not temporarily stopped, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the process is executed. The jackpot judgment and the selection process of the fluctuation pattern based on the pending data are executed. After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 22, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S303). .. A process is performed in which the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305) will be described in detail later, but the game is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306), and then this process ends. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (during probabilistic change) (S402). The determination of whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state is executed depending on whether or not the probabilistic variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state (during probability change)) (S402: Yes), a special hit is made based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value is determined, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (Fig. 10 (b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

It is determined whether the jackpot flag 203o is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using this jackpot flag 203o in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation that becomes a jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In S405, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is off, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has not started in the second special symbol (S405: No), the process of S403 or S404 is performed. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to on (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S405 that the jackpot flag 203o is on (S405: Yes), or when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order in the processing of S406 (S406: No), the first 1 A symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203o is already set to on, that is, by the second special symbol. When the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started, the setting of the deviation is forcibly executed by the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits are not executed at the same time, and the fluctuations that become big hits are continuously started in a short period of time, and the game store side. It is possible to suppress the problem that the damage becomes excessive.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. In this case, a dedicated jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the fluctuation of one special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is simulated. , It is conceivable to configure it to temporarily stop.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). The determination of whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the big hit is set in the process of S408. Here, it is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is a big hit by setting a dedicated flag (not shown) to on.

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (either the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, or the time-saving gaming state) is set. The variation pattern selection table 202d in which the hit / fail determination result of the corresponding first special symbol is a big hit is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10B) (S503). After that, the process of S505 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is set to be out of alignment (S501: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol according to the gaming state is out of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Is set (S504). After that, the process of S505 is executed.

In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S505). A special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is generated (set) (S506). A counter value is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r based on the selected fluctuation pattern (S507). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21, S107), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted and updated. (S602). Next, it is determined whether the value of the updated special 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0, that is, whether it is the fluctuation end timing of the first special symbol (S603). If it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S603, when it is determined that the fluctuation time end timing is reached (S603: Yes), it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set for the first special symbol being changed (S604). When it is determined that a jackpot is set for the first special symbol (S604: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q for setting the temporary stop of the second special symbol is set to ON. (S605). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is on is set (S606), and then the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S607). The time reduction counter 203k is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S608), and then the process proceeds to S609.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the first special symbol that is changing is set to be out of alignment (S604: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (S611). .. When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S611: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203k to update (S612). After that, the process proceeds to S609. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (S611: No), the process of S612 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of S609 as it is.

In the process of S609, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing to confirm and stop the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S609). The fluctuation stop of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S610). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on (S601: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S613), and the special figure 1 A special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203p is off is set (S614). After that, this process ends.

With this configuration, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the big hit game is started, the second special symbol can be set to be temporarily stopped. After that, after the jackpot game is completed, the remaining fluctuation time can be resumed for the second special symbol that is changing. Therefore, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, when one special symbol is a big hit, the other one that is changing is temporarily stopped and waits until the big hit game is completed. This allows the player to concentrate on the jackpot game.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 26, S206), the number of first special symbol hold balls in each process from S301 to S306 is compared with the above-mentioned first special symbol change start process (FIGS. 22 and S203). The counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) In each process from S701 to S706, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process. (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except that they are changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27, S705), in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), in contrast to the process of S401, the first special symbol hold ball execution area In the processing of S801, 203c is in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, and in contrast to the processing of S408, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is in the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the processing of S808. , S409 and S410 are the same as the processing of S809 and S810 except that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S706), the special figure 1 lottery result (first) is obtained with respect to the process of S501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) described above. In the process in which the special symbol lottery result) is S901, the special symbol 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result) is added to the special symbol 1 variable pattern command (first special symbol) for each process from S506 to S507. The variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r are the same except that they are changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s for each process of S906 to S907. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S207) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204) in the following points. In each process from S1001 to S1002 corresponding to each process from S601 to S602, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p and the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r are the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s. Will be changed to. In the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, the determination of whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the end timing is changed to the determination of whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end timing. In the process of S1004 corresponding to the process of S604, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot of special figure 1 is changed to the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot of special figure 2. In each process of S1005 to S1010 corresponding to each process of S605 to S610, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 confirmation command, and the first special The change stop of the symbol is changed to the special figure 1 change stop flag 203p, the special figure 1 change stop command, the start of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 confirmation command, and the change stop of the second special symbol, respectively. In each process of S1013 to S1014 corresponding to each process of S613 to S614, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command are changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, respectively. Be changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In addition, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can note that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display has not disappeared. You can grasp it and play a big hit game with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIGS. 30, S108) determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, and if a winning ball is won, the upper limit number of holdings (first starting port 64, first). This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, up to a maximum of four in each of the two starting ports 640). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, a process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 (S1101). Here, the winning of the first starting port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there was a starting prize) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (1104). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1105). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the special of the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203. It is held (stored) in the hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the variable type counter storage area 203c3, respectively (S1106).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described in detail later, but the first special in which the variation display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored. The number of the symbol and the second special symbol is determined in advance, and the hit / fail judgment result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, etc. are further determined from the fluctuation display order and each memorized counter value. Is executed.

Next, for each of the processes S1108 to S1114, the same process as the process performed for winning the game ball to the first starting port 64 executed in each process of S1101 to S1107 is performed. Since the only difference is that the process is executed for the start port 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 20, S108), will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the fluctuations, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Each value of the type counter CS1 is read out (S1121). The read data is rearranged. Among the vacant storage areas of the hold storage area 203t, the winning order is stored in the smallest area, and the variable display based on the newly stored hold data (each counter value) is started. The variable display start time is calculated (S1122).

As shown in FIG. 18, the fluctuation start time is the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the variation display corresponding to the newly stored reserved data (if the reserved data is based on the first starting port 64, the first special symbol and the second symbol). If the data is on hold based on the start port 640, the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and each hold data previously stored based on the same start ports 64 and 640 as the newly stored hold data are determined. It is calculated by adding each of the fluctuation times.

Here, each of the reserved data stored earlier based on the same start port as the newly stored hold data is the first if the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first start port 64. If the reserved data based on the first starting port 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored in, while the newly stored reserved data is the reserved data based on the second starting port 640, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 640.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the order after sorting is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the reserved data stored in the sort hold storage area 203t (S1123). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, all the reserved data are renumbered, but the renumbering is not limited to this, and when the variable display start order is switched from the previous time, that is, , When the variable display start order of newly stored pending data is interrupted by the variable display start order of the reserved data stored earlier, it is natural to configure so that only the changed order is renumbered. good.

It is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the newly stored reserved data starts to fluctuate is the high-probability gaming state (S1124). Regarding the game state when the fluctuation starts, there is a thing that the newly stored hold data stops by the time when the fluctuation starts, but the look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 is on, and after that, the hold that stops at the 15R normal jackpot is held. It is determined by determining whether or not it is present. When it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the newly stored reserved data starts to fluctuate is the high-probability gaming state (S1124: Yes), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high-probability time Based on the above, the validity of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding sort hold storage area 203t (S1125). On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state when the newly stored reserved data starts to fluctuate is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S1124: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low-probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, the hit / fail of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding sort hold storage area 203t (S1126).

The first look-ahead update process is executed (S1127). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127) will be described in detail later, but the result of determining whether the hold data (various counter values) stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is correct or not in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Based on, the jackpot type (whether or not it is probable) and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first look-ahead update process (S1127), which is one process of the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead update process (S1127).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127), first, it is determined whether the hit / fail determination result predicted by the process of S1125 or S1126 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) was a big hit (S1131). If it is determined that the hit / fail judgment result predicted by the process of S1125 or S1126 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) was a jackpot (S1131: Yes), was the predicted jackpot A or jackpot B? It is determined (S1132). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1132: Yes), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203t6 of the sort hold storage area 203t corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to on. (S1133). The look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 is set to off when the data is shifted to the higher holding area and stored, since the data in the holding area before the shift is cleared to 0. That is, the look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 once set to on is set to off by shifting the hold area in order and overwriting (clearing 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S1132: No), the process of S1134 is executed.

At the start of the variation display based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data from the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the game state (whether the probability variation or the time reduction is in progress) at the start of the variation display. The determined variation pattern is predicted (S1134). After that, the process proceeds to S1136.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail judgment result predicted by the process of S1125 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is incorrect (S1131: No), the gaming state (probability change or time reduction) at the start of the variation display From the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to (whether or not it is inside), the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data (S1135). ). After that, the process proceeds to S1136.

In the process of S1136, the predicted pass / fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern are stored in the area corresponding to the winning order of the rearranged hold storage area 203t (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S1136). The variable display start order of the reserved data newly stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is determined by interrupting (changing the order) with the previously stored variable display start order (S1137). .. It is determined that the variable display start order of the reserved data newly stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is not stored by interrupting (changing the order) with the previously stored variable display start order. If so (S1137: No), then the process proceeds to S1139. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display start order of the reserved data newly stored in the sort hold storage area 203t is interrupted (changed the order) from the previously stored variable display start order and stored. (S1137: Yes), the hold data after the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data (the hold data in the order in which the change starts after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored hold data stops changing). ), The hit / fail, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted and updated again (S1138). Next, each data is voiced based on the pass / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, winning order, fluctuation display start order, and look-ahead probability change flag 203t6 corresponding to all the hold data stored in the sort hold storage area 203t. A winning command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is generated for each pending data (S1139).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first start port 64 or the second start port 640 and is held until the corresponding special symbol can start the variable display, the hit / fail judgment or selection is made before the start of the variable display. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of the start of fluctuation by the operation of the player.

Further, when a new hold is stored and the change start order is changed by the hold (the change start order of the newly stored hold is interrupted and stored), the sort hold storage area 203t is used again. Of each stored hold area, for a hold that starts to fluctuate after the newly stored hold is stopped, the hit / fail judgment, stop type, and fluctuation pattern are updated, so that the hold is newly stored. As a result, even when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state) changes, accurate data can be updated.

In the present embodiment, when the newly stored change start order of the hold is interrupted and stored, the hold data (hit / fail judgment, stop type, change pattern) of the hold area is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, the determination may be made again for all the hold areas each time. With this configuration, the data in the hold area can be updated each time a new hold is stored, and more accurate data can always be configured.

Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 30, S108), will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1114).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114) pre-reads and stores the reserved data based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) winning a prize in the first start port 64. Fluctuation of pending data While this is a process of determining the display start order and making various judgments, the pending data based on winning a prize at the second starting port 640 is pre-read in advance and stored. Since the same process is executed only in that it is a process of determining the variation display start order of the above and performing various determinations, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as for the second look-ahead update process (S1147), which is one of the second look-ahead processes (FIG. 33, S1114) shown in FIG. 34, the above-mentioned first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127) is the first. Fluctuations in pending data based on winning in 1 start port 64 While this is a process of predicting various selection data based on the display start order and generating a winning command, the second start port 640 won a prize. The same process is executed except that the process is to predict various selection data and generate a winning command based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the above, so detailed explanation is omitted. do.

In this way, the game ball wins in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When this is done (holding data is stored), the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114) is executed. The newly stored hold data is stored in the hold ball storage area 203t in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114) in which the order in which the variable display starts is sorted first. Since it is determined by comparing with the variable display start time of each reserved data, it is possible to accurately determine the game state (whether or not the probability is changing) when the stored reserved data is started to be variablely displayed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the hit / fail determination result, the stop type, the variation pattern to be displayed, and the like. Therefore, next, even when the reserved data is newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second Based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each reserved data predicted in the look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114), the fluctuation display start time of the newly stored reserved data can be accurately predicted. As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data interrupts the variable display start order of the previously stored reserved data (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold is stored. For each hold data in the variation display start order after the data, the game state at the start of the variation display is predicted again by the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 33, S1114). Therefore, since the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (look-ahead), the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 35, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit. (S1161). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display unit 83 to the middle of the opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1161: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1161: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display unit 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 83 has elapsed (S1162: Yes). S1163). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1184 and the processing of S1185, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display mounting unit 88.

In the process of S1163, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1163: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1163, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1163: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 83 is set (S1164). .. In the process of S1164, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1178, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display unit 83 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1177, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display unit 83 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1164, the variation display in the second symbol display unit 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1177 and the process of S1178. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display unit 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1165). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1165: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1166). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1165: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1162, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1162: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1167).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1168). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1168: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 g is not 0 (S1168: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (S1169).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1170). In the process of S1170, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1171).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1172). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not in the time reduction) (S1172: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol (FIG. 10 (d)) for low probability time. Based on the above, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1173). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the time reduction is in progress) (S1172: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (that is, the time reduction is in progress). S1174). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1174: Yes), the process of S1173 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1174: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per ordinary symbol (FIG. 10 (d)) for high probability is used. Based on this, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1175).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1176). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a miss) (S1176: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of the miss is set. (S1177). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a hit (that is, a hit) (S1176: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of hit, is displayed. It is set (S1178).

It is determined whether the gaming state is in the time-saving gaming state (including the probabilistic gaming state) (S1179). If it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S1179: Yes), the process of S1181 is executed. If it is determined that the time-saving game is not in progress (S1179: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1180). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1180: Yes), the process of S1181 is executed.

In the process of S1181, the opening time of the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1181). On the other hand, in the processing of S1180, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, it is in a low probability gaming state) (S1180: No), the normal electric accessory 640a The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s, and the number of times the blade is opened is set to 1 (S1182).

It is determined whether the gaming state is in the time-saving gaming state (including the probabilistic gaming state) (S1183). When it is determined that the time is being shortened (S1183: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3s (S1184). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S1183: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1185). After the processes of S1184 and S1185 are executed, this process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, and when the game ball has passed. , This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 36, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S1191). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (S1191: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is acquired (S1192). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1193).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S1191: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 g is If it is not less than 4 (S1193: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S1191: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1193: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter. The value (M) of 203 g is added by 1 (S1194). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above and the first normal symbol flag are set to the free hold area (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the hold 4) (S1195). In the process of S1195, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203 g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether or not the player is performing a correct game corresponding to the game state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), the game is performed by a striking method (hereinafter, left-handed) in which the gaming ball is launched with the strength that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Is the regular game method, and during the jackpot game, the time-saving game state, and the probability change game state, the game ball is launched with the strength that the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, right-handed hit). ) Is the regular game method. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 640a blocks the second starting port 640, and the winning rate for the first starting port 64 on the right side is lower than that of the first starting port 64 on the left side. Since it is set, it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal game state. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not the player is playing in the correct way, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player. In addition, it is possible to monitor the illegal right-handed hit to win the second starting port 640, and the damage caused by the illegality can be reduced.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 37, S111), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot game (S1201). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1201: No), it is determined whether the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S1202). When it is determined that the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is in progress (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol has stopped fluctuating (S1203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is in suspension of fluctuation (S1203: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204). After that, this process ends. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game by the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the game state. As will be described later, when the time for which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to be ON exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality by the command. (The third symbol display device 81 is executed with a character indicating that it is abnormal (for example, a character display (for example, right-handed) suggesting the correct game method) is executed, and an error sound or an instruction sound for the correct game is heard by voice. It is output and an abnormal signal is output to the hall computer))) is executed.

In this way, in the probabilistic game state or the time saving state, in the correct game method, the right-handed game is performed and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. 1 If the special symbol is not displayed in a fluctuating manner for a certain period of time, it is possible to monitor whether or not an illegal game is performed so that the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player by notifying the abnormality, is not displayed in a fluctuating manner. can. Therefore, fraud can be detected at an early stage, and damage to the amusement store can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1201: Yes), and in S1203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S1203: No), abnormality monitoring is performed. Flag 203v is set to off (S1205).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1202 that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (S1202: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1206). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress (S1206: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, when the normal symbol that can be changed only in the right-handed game is displayed in a variable manner in the normal game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. An abnormality alarm command is set when 20 seconds have passed while the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but after the jackpot game, the time saving game, and the probability change game are completed, the holding ball of the normal symbol (maximum 4 balls) ) Is stored, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner even after shifting to the left-handed state, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but in that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is Since it is 3 seconds, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off before the abnormality alarm command is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality notification is executed even though the game is played by the correct game method.

On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the normal symbol is stopped (S1206: No), it is determined whether the second special symbol is in the variable display (S1207). When it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1207: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, when the game state is not a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state, that is, a normal game state, it is a normal game method to play a game by hitting left, but a variable display is displayed when hitting right. If the second special symbol that can be made is changing, it means that the game is being played by the wrong game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203v to ON, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON for a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment) or more, the abnormality notification is executed, so that an illegal game is played. Can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the amusement store due to fraud.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the second special symbol is stopped changing (S1207: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off (S1208). After that, this process ends. In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), it is determined whether the normal symbol, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol is stopped in a state in which the reserved ball is not stored and is stopped in fluctuation. .. In the state where the reserved ball is stored, the temporary stopped state (the stopped state from the variable stop to the start of the fluctuation by the next reserved ball) is determined not to be in the variable stop but to be in the variable.

Here, when the game state is the normal game state and the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating, the game is performed by left-handed, which is the correct game method, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off. It is avoided that the abnormality alarm command described later is set. Therefore, even if the player plays the game for a short time by the wrong game method without malicious intent, the abnormality notification is not immediately performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the abnormality notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 20) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fraud monitoring process (S112). In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), the time when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to be turned on is timed, and when the time exceeds a predetermined time (20 seconds or more in this embodiment), an abnormality alarm command is set. The process is executed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211). When it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211: Yes), the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1212). It is determined whether or not the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 20 seconds) (S1213). If it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is less than the upper limit value (S1213: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (S1213: Yes), an abnormality alarm command is set (S1214). After that, this process ends.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Upon receiving this abnormality alarm command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 to output the mode of the abnormality alarm. As a result, fraud and defects can be detected at an early stage.

Further, by configuring the abnormality alarm command to be set when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to the on for a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) after the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to the on. Even if there is a period during which the game is not performed by the regular game method (for example, the period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) for a short time (less than 20 seconds) when the game state is switched, immediately Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined time is set to 20 seconds, but the predetermined time is not limited to 20 seconds. Just do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the game operation.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off (S1211: No), the process of resetting the abnormality monitoring counter 203w to 0, which is the initial value, is executed. After that, this process ends.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal game method is used. It is possible to suppress the problem that an abnormality alarm is output even though the game is being played.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1221) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 40), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1231). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1232). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1233).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1234), and if it is turned on (S1234: Yes), the process shifts to S1240. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1234: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235), and if it is not stored. (S1235: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1240 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1236), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1237: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1240 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1240, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1240). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1241, S1242) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1241 and S1242) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1241, S1242) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1241 and S1242), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1241), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1242). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1243.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1234: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1235: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1237: Yes), the power off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1238). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1239), and the process proceeds to S1243. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1243). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1244). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1250) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process (S1250) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1250). In this main process (S1250), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each of the sub-sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1251).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1252). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1253) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the jackpot A or jackpot C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entry port (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the ball has been hit and the ball is entered, a process of setting data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set to the probabilistic game state is executed in the state setting area after the big hit.

When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot control process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display unit 83 displays the value. The variation display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process is shifted to S1251 and each process after S1251 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the initial time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of, the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1259, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1265), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1251 to S1258, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1301) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a probability variation setting process (S1254), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of this probability variation setting process (S1254).

In the probability variation setting process (FIG. 42, S1254), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot C is being executed (S1261). If it is determined that the jackpot A or jackpot C is not being executed (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot A or the jackpot C is being executed, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second specific entry port 650a (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific entry port 650a (S1262: Yes), the probability variation setting data is set in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m (S1263). After that, a ball entry notification command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the ball has entered the second specific ball entry port 650a is set (S1264). Here, in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m, the time-saving game state is set by default, and the data for setting the probabilistic game state when the game ball enters the second specific entry port 650a. Is rewritten to. When the probabilistic game state is set, the data is automatically rewritten to the default time-saving game state data.

As a result, when the game ball does not enter the second specific entry port 650a, the time saving game state is automatically set after the big hit game regardless of the big hit main, so that the control of the main control device 110 is performed. The load can be reduced.

Further, as will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ball entry notification command, the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 output a notification mode for notifying that the probability variation game state is given. Is controlled. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game state after the big hit game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a jackpot control process (S1255), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1255).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 43, S1255), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1271). In the process of S1271, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1271: Yes), the value of the round number counter is set to 0 (S1272), and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1271 when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1271: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1273). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1273, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1273: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1273, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1274). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1274: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened (S1275), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1275). S1276), 1 is added to the value of the round number counter (S1277). After adding 1 to the value of the round number counter, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1251) of the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1274, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1274: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1278). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, or when the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after opening, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1278, if the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1278: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed ( S1279), the process proceeds to S1280. In the process of S1280, it is determined whether it is the final round (S1280). In the process of S1280, if it is not the final round (S1280: No), this process ends. In the processing of S1280, if it is the final round (S1280: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1281), and the state setting area 203u and the time reduction counter 203k are set based on the game state set in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m. And are set (S1282). In the process of S1282, if the gaming state set in the jackpot post-hit state area 203m is the time saving gaming state, 100 is set as the value of the time saving counter 203k. As a result, it is possible to grant 100 times of the time-saving game after shifting to the time-saving game state.

Next, a state command corresponding to the state area 203u is set (S1283), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1278, if the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1278: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1418 (see FIG. 45) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 45 and S1415), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1418. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1418 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1418. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1418 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the data shifts to S1308.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIGS. 45 and S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is executed, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then an interrupt is interrupted. The permission is set (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1308 was performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that when the processing of S1308 is reached via the processing of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1400). S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the process of S1401, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S1402 to S1410 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1401: Yes). S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process (S1406), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. ..

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the sortable period (the period during which the jackpot game is in progress and the state in which there is no hold), which will be described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts to change. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). After that, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1411, a command determination process that performs a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1411). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46. Next, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for the purpose, is executed (S1412). Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

After the variation display setting process (S1412), the variation update process is executed (S1413). The details of this fluctuation update process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

After the variation update process (S1413), the probability variation period notification process is executed (S1414). The details of this probability change period notification process (processing according to the command received from the S1414 main control device 110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

When the processing of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1419), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1400) is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1411). This command determination process (S1411) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110. To judge. The details of the command determination process (S1411) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1411), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 48, S1412) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1504). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command has been received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to on when the first stop type command is received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to on. (S1508). The stop type (either 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1509). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Are identifiablely stored in each.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is the voice lamp. The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d1 (S1511).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 (starting winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1508, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value with the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203t of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1513). Here, the information of each hold area in the sorted hold storage area 203t extracted is the hit / fail judgment result, jackpot type, change pattern type, change display order, and time until the start of change display for each hold. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515: Yes), and if the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is received, the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 Is set to on, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is received, the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is set to on (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S1515: No), it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S1517). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S1517: Yes), the state corresponding to the received command is set in the subordinate state setting area 223h (S1518).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1517: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the hold quantity display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the pending quantity display update process (S1406). This hold quantity display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the hold symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each hold area of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k. ..

In the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 47, S1406), first, the change display start time of each hold area of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is updated (S1601). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the variable start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is turned on is the hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is turned off in the variable display start order. The symbol display generates a display hold display command for displaying the hold symbol display in the order in which the hold is established (S1602).

Here, the sorting flag 223k7 is operated by the frame button 22 during the sorting possible period in the hold sorting process (FIGS. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later (in this embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7). When pressed), it is set to on in all hold areas where hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed reserved symbol displays are rearranged from the order in which the hold is established, based on the order in which the variable display of the hold is started. On the other hand, with respect to the newly stored hold after the sort flag 223k7 is set to on, since the sort flag 223k7 is off, the order is established without sorting, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the reserved symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol display and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and then the reserved symbol display is rearranged. However, the sorted reserved symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the reserved symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurring) hold is displayed first in the established order. Since it is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display without interrupting it, the player can suppress the problem of confusing the current display in what order. Can be done.

Further, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the variable display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

In addition, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is usually selected in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same start ports 64 and 630 as the hold that is the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the variable display start time is earlier for the hold with a later establishment order that occurs at the start ports 64 and 640, which is different from the hold that is a big hit. In such a case, when the reserved symbols are rearranged, the reserved symbols with a later establishment order are displayed by interrupting the reserved symbols with an earlier establishment order (on the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side). NS. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbols display, when the reserved symbols with a later formation order are displayed by interrupting before the reserved symbols with an earlier formation order, the player can display the reserved symbols. Among the reserved symbols displayed before the interrupted and displayed reserved symbol, the hold that occurred by winning a prize at the starting port 64,640 different from the interrupted and displayed reserved symbol may be a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variation display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1412). This variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 14R normal jackpot), a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 48, S1412), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1611). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is off (S1611: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the processing of S1616 is performed. To execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is on (S1611: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to off (S1612).

Next, in the process of S1613, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIGS. 46 and S1411) is used in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. The first special symbol display variation pattern command is generated (S1613). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1613 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is subjected to the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 45, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. The first special symbol (third symbol) is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed).

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b1 is decremented by 1 in accordance with (the display has been set), and the reserved data stored in the subordinate sort pending storage area 223k is moved to the previous reserved area. It is shifted (S1614). More specifically, hold area 1 → 1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol of variable display data, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3, hold The data in each area is shifted such as area 5 → hold area 4, hold area 6 → hold area 5, hold area 7 → hold area 6, hold area 8 → hold area 7. After that, a counter value is set in the fluctuation time counter 223e in FIG. 1 (S1615).

When the processing of S1615 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1616). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S1616: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S1621 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1616: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S1617). Next, in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIGS. 46 and S1411), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S1618).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1618 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is subjected to the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 45, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command in the right display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81. The second special symbol (third symbol) is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol hold ball count counter 223d1 is decremented by 1 according to the display setting), and the hold data stored in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k is moved to the previous hold area. It is shifted (S1619). More specifically, hold area 1 → 1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol of variable display data, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3, hold The data in each area is shifted such as area 5 → hold area 4, hold area 6 → hold area 5, hold area 7 → hold area 6, hold area 8 → hold area 7.

After that, a counter value is set in the fluctuation time counter 223f in FIG. 2 (S1620), and the process proceeds to S1621.

It is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON (S1621). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) are not set on (that is, off) (S1621: No). , End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on (S1621: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag When (not shown) is on, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off, and when the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on. The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off (S1622).

Next, in the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1411), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1623). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type (whether it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 14R normal jackpot) is given to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. The first stop type command for display is generated for notification. If the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, whether the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot or 14R normal jackpot) is applied to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. ) Is generated for display (S1624). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained, and is notified even when the determination result is incorrect. .. If the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time.

In addition, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control unit 110 by shifting the data in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k based on the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is not necessary to control the transmission of the main control device 110, and the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the variation update process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this variation update process (S1413). This fluctuation update process (FIG. 49, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the variation update process (FIGS. 49, S1413), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 becomes a big hit, and the other variation display becomes the jackpot. During the game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

In the variation update process (FIG. 49, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the slave special figure 1 variation stop flag 223c2 is set to ON (S1701). When it is determined that the slave special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the display special figure 1 provisional change command is set (S1702). The display special figure 1 provisional change command is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the change display of the first special symbol being displayed by the third symbol display device 81. When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (main symbol on the left, middle, and right) to be displayed by slightly shaking after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. Further, by displaying the characters "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand, and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed in a variable manner has been temporarily stopped due to a big hit, and the lottery that was being displayed in a variable manner disappears or becomes invalid. You can play the game with peace of mind by preventing you from becoming anxious if you do.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and may be a configuration in which the first special symbol is erased from the left display area Dm and the temporary stop is notified only by characters. However, other configurations may be used as a matter of course.

When the display first temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol measured in the slave first fluctuation time storage area 223i is interrupted (paused).

With this configuration, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is restarted, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the slave special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the value of the slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is from 0. Whether it is large or not is determined (S1703). If it is determined that the value of the variation time counter 223e in FIG. 1 is 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1706 as it is. When it is determined that the value of the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is larger than 0 (S1703: Yes), the secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is subtracted and updated (S1704), and the special figure 1 for display is updated. Set the fluctuation time command (S1705). The display special figure 1 fluctuation time command causes the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol being displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the display first temporary stop command. It is a command to control. Like the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop.

When the display special figure 1 fluctuation time command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary second fluctuation time storage area 223j is interrupted (paused).

With this configuration, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is restarted, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop flag 223d2 of the secondary special figure 2 is set to ON (S1706). If it is determined that the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1706: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary fluctuation command for display is set (S1707), and then this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the slave special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the value of the slave special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is from 0. Whether it is large or not is determined (S1708). If it is determined that the value of the variation time counter 223f in FIG. 2 is 0 (S1708: No), the present process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the value of the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is larger than 0 (S1708: Yes), the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f is subtracted and updated (S1709), and the display special figure 2 is displayed. A variable time command is set (S1710), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select a fluctuation pattern according to the remaining fluctuation time. Not limited to this, when the main controller 110 restarts the temporarily stopped fluctuation table time, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or the fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time depends on the remaining fluctuation time. It may be configured to select a variation pattern. When a fluctuation pattern with a slightly shorter fluctuation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the difference between the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern with a slightly shorter fluctuation time so as to delay the fluctuation table time. , The fluctuation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be performed according to the remaining fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the probability variation period notification process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this probability variation period notification processing process (S1414). This probability variation period notification process (FIG. 50, S1414) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the probability change period notification process (FIG. 50, S1414), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is the probability change state (S1801).

If it is determined that the gaming state is not the probabilistic state (S1801: No), the present process is terminated as it is. In the process of S1801, when it is determined that the gaming state is the probabilistic state (S1801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot B of the special figure 1 in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k (S1803). ). If it is determined that there is a jackpot B of special figure 1 in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k (S1803: Yes), the time until the jackpot B of special figure 1 that is stored is stored is stored as a probability variation upper limit value. The area is set to 223i (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1806.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, if there is no jackpot B in the special figure 1 in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k (S1803: No), the total fluctuation time of the stored special figure 1 is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i. Then (S1805), the process proceeds to S1806.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation is possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. can. Further, the sortable period may not be particularly provided, and the sort display may be executed if the sort is possible when the frame button 22 is operated.

In the process of S1806, the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is updated (S1806), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is larger than 0 (S1807). In the process of S1807, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is 0 (S1807: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S1808). In the process of S1808, if the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S1808: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1811. If the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is 0 (S1808: No), 5s is set in the probability variation period storage area (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1813.

On the other hand, in the process of S1807, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is larger than 0 (S1807: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is an additional trigger (S1810). If it is determined in the process of S1810 that it is not an additional opportunity (S1810: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that it is an additional opportunity (S1810: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired, the addition time is selected (S1811), and the selected addition time is added to the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j. Then, the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is set as the upper limit value (S1812), and the process proceeds to S813.

In the process of S1813, a display period command corresponding to the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is set (S1813), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual variation display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noted next (the special symbol that will be the variation display start). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be seen in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

Further, in the configuration of this pachinko machine, the sorting device 630 makes it easy for the game ball to win the prize alternately between the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 64a, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily won. The game is played evenly, and the game can be played efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the rearrangement of the reserved symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new hold is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variation display start order by the reserved symbols sorted in the variation start order.

In the present embodiment, the sortable period is other than the state in which there is no hold established during the jackpot game or at different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is no hold of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Although it has been described as the game state of, not limited to this, the sortable period may be set even during the jackpot game, and conversely, the sortable period is the period during which a specific variable display mode is displayed. Others may be set, and it may be determined as appropriate.

When the jackpot game is set to the sortable period, it is necessary to perform sorting in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special symbol or the second special symbol and the remaining fluctuation time during the temporary stop. Then, the sort order is determined, and the sort is performed based on the sort order. With this configuration, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed are combined. , The accurate variation start order can be sorted, and the accurate variation start order can be notified to the player even during the jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store the rearranged data. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (win / fail determination result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a winning command. The audio lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform sorting.

With this configuration, the main control device 110 backs up various data required for sorting to the RAM 203 even when a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored, the various data are used in the start-up process (FIG. 32). By outputting the data to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily recover from the power failure by rearranging the data based on the various data.

In the present embodiment, the reserved first special symbol or the first special symbol or the second special symbol is held according to the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the fluctuation start and the fluctuation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. 2 The fluctuation start time of the special symbol was calculated, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to that, at the time of winning a game ball, information (time information) as to whether or not the fluctuation mode is longer than a certain time is determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation mode is a reach, and the time information and the fluctuation are in progress. The fluctuation start order may be roughly determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol of No. 1 and rearranged. With this configuration, at the time of winning, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation mode is a reach (whether or not it is a long-term fluctuation mode or a short-time fluctuation mode), and the accurate fluctuation time (variation mode) can be determined. Even with the pachinko machine 10 determined by information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation, the player can be notified of the rough start order of fluctuation.

Therefore, although the player may not have an accurate fluctuation start order, the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term fluctuation mode (variation mode that becomes reach). , You can play the game with the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the sortable period is determined according to the game state, but is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the sort is possible (for example, a state in which the reserved symbol display is displayed). It may be configured to notify that sorting is possible. With this configuration, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to sort.

<Regarding the control process executed by the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 62, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 51, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S3001 in FIG. 51) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 51) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 52, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S3102 and S3102, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S5302 in FIG. 60A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S4108 in FIG. 53 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4109 in FIG. 53 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while it is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect is the main control. When the device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. It can be carried out. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S3005, the interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 53B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (S4102) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S4103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56.

In the display setting process (S4103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S4104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4103) or the simple display setting process (S4109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S4105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S4106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4105), which are determined in the task process (S4104), are used. , Is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S4107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4109) is executed to shift to the process of S4104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 54, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S4103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S4203).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4204). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S4204: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S4205), and the process returns to the process of S4201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4205) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S4205). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S4205) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S4301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S4301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S4303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S4303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4304), and a pointer is used. Initialize 233f to 0 (S4305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S4306), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S4302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4304, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 54. In the processing of S4204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4206). If there is a stop type command for display (S4206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S4207), and the process returns to the process of S4201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4207) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing (S4207), first, it corresponds to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of order, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. The stop type table is determined (S4401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S4402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it to off (S4403) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S4104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4403, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S4402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4208), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S4208: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4209), and the process returns to the process of S4201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4209) will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S5303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S4801). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4802. ..

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set by S4802 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 54. In the processing of S4208, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4210), and there is an error command. If (S4210: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S4211), and the process returns to the processing of S4201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S4211) will be described with reference to FIG. 56B. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4902), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4902 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S4902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 54. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S4210 (S4210: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4212), and the process returns to the process of S4201.

In the processing of S4201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4201: Yes). ), The processing of S4202 to S4212 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4201 to S4212 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4108), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B), is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see Fig. 55 (a)) and stop type command processing (see Fig. 55 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 55A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4301. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S5001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S5001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S5002 to S5004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S5001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S5002), S5003 to S5004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S5003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S5003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S5003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S5004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S5101).

In the task processing (S4104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S5101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S5102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 57. After the warning image setting process (S5004) or in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S5003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5005.

In S5005, the pointer update process is executed (S5005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S5201 and then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S5202). As a result, if it is End information (S5202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S5203), and if it is a demo display data table (S5203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S5204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S5203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S5203). S5206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 57 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5006). In the task processing (S4104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S5006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S5007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S5008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S5008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S5008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S5009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S5009: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S5010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S5012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S5014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S5015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S4104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S5015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S5009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S5009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S5016). If the demo display flag is off (S5016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5017), and the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S5019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S5021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S5016, if the demo display flag is on (S5016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S4109), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image when the power is turned on ends, one of the variation images when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S4105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S5302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S5301 (S5301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S5302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S5401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S5401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5402). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S5402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5403. Further, as a result of the processing of S5401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S5403.

In the process of S5403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S5403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S5403 (S5403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S5405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S4108 in FIG. 53 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S4109 in FIG. 53 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 54 to 56) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 59) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S5301: No in FIG. 60 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S5303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S5303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S5005) of the display setting process (S4103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S5501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S5502), and if it is the transfer data information (S5502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505.

Further, in the process of S5502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S5502: No), the processes of S5503 and S5504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5505. In the process of S5505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S5505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5506).

In the process of S5506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S5506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5506: Yes), the process proceeds to 53507. Further, as a result of the processing of S5505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S5505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S5507.

In the process of S5507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S5507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S5517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S5513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S5513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S5513: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S5514), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S5516), and the process proceeds to S5517.

In the process of S5517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5517). The discrimination in the processing of S5517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S5517, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5517 (S5517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5518). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S5518, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5519), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S4106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (not shown) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4105) (S5601). That is, in the processing of S5601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S5602 (S5603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 53 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the period in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode (normal effect period) and the period in which the effect is executed in a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode (normal effect period). There are two types of periods (special effect period), and which period is currently determined by the voice lamp control device 114 based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 262. Then, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variation pattern type corresponding to the determined effect period is selected, and the variation is made in the third symbol display device 81 based on the selected variation pattern type. The pattern effect is executed.

Further, each time the voice lamp control device 114 determines that the effect period has been switched to a different effect period, a command corresponding to the effect period after the switch is output to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the current effect period based on the command output by the voice lamp control device 114, and selects a display data table corresponding to the round effect or the demo effect based on the determined effect period. do.

As a result, the effect modes of the variable pattern effect, the round effect, and the demo effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 may be executed in the normal effect mode or in a special effect mode according to the elapsed time. do. Therefore, each time the player switches to a different production mode, the player can feel the novelty, so that the game can be suppressed from becoming monotonous, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when determining the effect period by the voice lamp control device 114, the time is determined from the time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 262, and the type of the effect period is switched according to the time zone. Instead, the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired during the start-up process and the time information acquired during the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of the production period is determined based on the elapsed time T. There is. As a result, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aged deterioration or the like in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the time information deviated from each other is produced during the production period. It is possible to reduce the influence of the deviation because it can be converted into a relative value of the elapsed time T and used for the judgment of the type of the effect period, instead of being directly used for the judgment of the type of the effect.

Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Therefore, since the production period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and the other pachinko machines 10 have a special production period, so that the player playing the game can play the game. It is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness that the production is performed in a production mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the time information acquired during the start-up process based on the power-on is stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b of the time-keeping device 262 to measure the time. Since the device 262 continues to be supplied with power from the timekeeping device power supply 263 even during the power failure state, the time information stored in the on-time storage area 352b is retained even during the power failure state. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the turn-on time storage area storage area 352b instead of the time information measured by the timekeeping device 262 at the time of turning on the power. The time information that has been stored is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and is used to determine the elapsed time T.

As a result, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is cut off due to reasons such as the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection. Even if it becomes necessary to set the state, simply turn on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, and the time acquisition process will be performed when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 when the power is cut off can be stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 again. ..

Therefore, if the power is turned on all at once with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, one pachinko machine 10 is subsequently turned off. However, the elapsed time T can be determined based on the time information when the power is turned on all at once by simply turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal production period to the special production period and the timing of switching from the special production period to the normal production period based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, so that the power is cut off. It is possible to prevent the timing at which the production mode can be switched from being shifted only by the pachinko machine 10, and the player playing the game feels uncomfortable that the production is performed in a production mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. In the first embodiment described above, a configuration for switching the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d for acquiring the variation pattern of the special symbol depending on the game state has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, the type of the fluctuation pattern table 202d is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times when a small hit different from the big hit is won. Until then, it differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to switch to a specific variation pattern table.

Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
As for the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment. Specifically, the small hit random number table 202e (see FIG. 63 (a)) and the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)) have been added, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d have been changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 63A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202e. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value, and if they do not match, the small hit random number table 202e It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value set in (see FIG. 63 (a)).

In the small hit random number table 202e, as shown in FIG. 63A, the number of small hit determination values is assigned differently for each of the normal game state and the probabilistic game state. In the normal game state, the determination value is not set. As a result, in the normal game state, the small hit determination value is not set, and the small hit is not won (determined) in the normal game state. Further, in the probabilistic game state, a value of "100 to 129" is set as a small hit determination value with respect to the value of the special hit random number counter C1. That is, in the probabilistic game state, if the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is any of "100 to 129", it is determined that the hit is a small hit. The determination value of the small hit is set to a value different from the determination value (“0 to 9” in the present embodiment) determined to be the big hit. Therefore, when it is determined that the hit is a miss (not a big hit), it is determined whether the hit is a small hit, and it is possible to add a difference in added value even in the miss.

As will be described later, when it is determined that a small hit is made, a 2R (round) small hit is executed in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a short time (1 second). The small hit is composed of a smaller number of game balls (prize balls) that the player can obtain as compared with the big hits (big hits A to C) (because the number of rounds is small and the opening time is short). In addition, the game state is not changed even after the small hit game. On the other hand, after the small hit game, it is easy to set the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in which a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected, so that the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is easily selected.

Here, in the probabilistic game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the lottery of the second special symbol (the jackpot B is determined and the continuation of the probabilistic game state ends). Since it is set, the player expects to reduce the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) in the first special symbol as much as possible. Therefore, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, by winning a small hit, it is easy to select a first special symbol having a long fluctuation time, thereby giving the player an advantageous state. can. Therefore, the player can feel advantageous even if the prize ball obtained is a small hit. As a result, it is possible to expect a small hit in addition to the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game early.

Next, the small hit selection table 202f stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit selection table 202f. The small hit selection table 202f is a data table for determining the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d to be transferred based on the value of the acquisition counter (not shown) acquired later when the small hit is won.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small hit is configured to be determined only by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic game state. When this small hit is won, the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong is out of order (probability change). Special Figure 1 The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is selected. In this state (hereinafter referred to as when a normal table is selected), any of the deviation (probability variation) special figures 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c)) becomes the value of the transition counter. Determined based on.

In the small hit selection table 202f, when the normal table is selected, the transition counter deviates from "0 to 100" (probability variation) and the variation transition table 1 deviates from "101 to 150" (probability variation). However, the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation transition table 3 is set for each of "151 to 198". Further, the number of transitions is set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. The number of transitions is the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol from the setting of the table to the automatic switching to the detached (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)). ..

For example, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64 (a)), as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)), 10 transitions are set as the number of transitions. Therefore, from the time the table is set until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, this wrong (probability change) special figure 1 change transition table 1 (FIG. 64 (a). ) Refer to) to select the fluctuation pattern. When the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) is set, and if the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 A variation pattern is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)).

As will be described in detail later, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3, variation patterns having a longer variation time than the deviation (probability variation) normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) are displayed. It is structured so that it can be easily selected. Here, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to draw more in the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, that is, to reduce the number of lottery in the first special symbol. Therefore, the number of lottery for the first special symbol in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be long can be reduced per unit time, so that the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a state advantageous to the player by setting the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 that are won in the small hit. Further, as the number of transitions is large, the number of times that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected can be increased, so that the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol can be further reduced, and a state advantageous to the player can be set. can do.

If any of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is selected and a small hit is won, the transition counter is shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)). If the value of is any of "0 to 10", the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is set. Off (probability change) Special Figure 1 Fluctuation The number of transitions is set to 100 in the transition table 4. Further, as will be described later, in this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 (see FIG. 65), it is easy to select a variation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 to 3. It is configured. Therefore, setting the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 can be more advantageous to the player than setting the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 to 3. ..

Further, the number of transitions of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is 100 times, and the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is set over a long period of time. Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is drawn by the second special symbol, the jackpot C is always determined, so that the probability change game state is continuously set even after the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to be done. If the probabilistic game state is continuously set, it will be off until the first special symbol fluctuates up to the number of times set by the number of transitions (probability change). It is possible to continuously set a state that is advantageous to the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63 (c), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern table 202d, which is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 63 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d. In the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d, the gaming state is the probability variation game state, the hit / fail judgment result is disappointing, and any of the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 4 is set. If not, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in this table.

In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)), the deviation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the normal reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the above and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach composed of the fluctuation time of 90 seconds are set respectively.

Further, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned and set for each fluctuation pattern, and the type of the fluctuation pattern 1 is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of the fluctuation. ..

The deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is configured so that the deviation pattern is determined with a probability of 101/199. The fluctuation time of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern selected in the probabilistic gaming state is 30 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined in the normal gaming state of 5 seconds (FIG. 11 (a)). The fluctuation time is longer than (see). Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state, a variation pattern having a longer variation time than in the normal gaming state is easily selected in the first special symbol, and is set to be advantageous to the player. In addition, the probability of being selected is set lower than the deviation pattern, but the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and the fluctuation pattern of super reach, which are fluctuation patterns with a longer fluctuation time, are set. As a result, by determining the fluctuation pattern of the longer fluctuation time, it is possible to give the player an advantageous state (in the present embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state is given to the player for a long period of time).

Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (a), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 will be described. FIG. 64A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1. In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) is set in the probability change gaming state, and a small hit is won. If the value of the transition counter (not shown) is any of the values of "0 to 100", the table is selected. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 is set with 10 transition times, and is continuously set until the first special symbol changes 10 times or the game state is changed. It is configured to be.

In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the deviation pattern composed of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. A fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern composed of a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 composed of a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern of long reach 2 composed of a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. Fluctuation patterns are set respectively.

In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64 (a)), the long deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 63 (c)) was not set. Fluctuation patterns of reach 1 and long reach 2 are set. The long reach 1 and the long reach 2 have long fluctuation times of 180 seconds and 600 seconds. Therefore, during this fluctuation time, no new fluctuation is started in the first special symbol, so that the probability variation game state is continued by drawing lots in the second special symbol during that period. That is, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time of the deviation of the first special symbol can be considered as a period in which the continuation of the probabilistic game is confirmed.

Here, in the probabilistic game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is deviated (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. A variation pattern is selected from 13 (b)), and if the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern is selected from the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13 (c)). In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13B), the deviation pattern composed of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected with a probability of 151/199. It is configured so that the out-of-order fluctuation pattern is extremely easy to select. Further, even the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having the longest fluctuation time has a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the probability of being selected is 8/199, which is difficult to be selected as compared with other fluctuation patterns. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is different in the probabilistic game state, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time. 2 Can be executed with a special symbol.

Furthermore, the hold memory that becomes the jackpot B is stored in the hold of the first special symbol, and the period until the lottery result is displayed (actually, the period until the fluctuation display is started) is highly probable. It can be replaced as the period during which the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol is executed (the period during which the actual probability-changing gaming state continues).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the effect as if the probabilistic gaming state is set in a finite time is performed. In this effect, the fluctuation time (time until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol is started) in which the hit / fail judgment result of the first special symbol executed in the probabilistic game state is deviated is determined, and the time is determined. It is performed as an effect to notify the player as the remaining time of the probability change within the range of. By this effect, the player can play the game with the expectation that as many big hit games as possible will be executed by making as many big hits as possible with the second special symbol while the probabilistic game state remains.

In addition, the content of the newly stored reserved memory of the first special symbol is determined, the remaining period of the probabilistic gaming state is determined, and the remaining period of the probabilistic gaming state is extended within that range (FIG. 5 (FIG. 5). By executing b)), a sense of relief can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the remaining period of the probabilistic gaming state will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with expectations other than the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, the symbol showing the first special symbol is a symbol sequence composed of two types of "○" and "×" in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in two columns in parallel. Even if the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment, even if it is a fluctuation pattern that becomes reach, "○" and "×" are repeatedly displayed alternately at high speed, and when the fluctuation time elapses, a display mode (big hit) showing the result of judgment of success or failure. If there is, "○" is aligned, and if it is off, "x" is aligned or displayed as a combination of "○" and "x").

Therefore, when the player is in the probabilistic game state, he / she mainly plays the game by paying attention to the symbol indicating the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from becoming bored even if it is displayed in a variable manner for a long time. In addition, even if the player does not know that the longer the deviation time of the first special symbol is, the more advantageous the player is, the effect of notifying the remaining probable change period is displayed, so that the game is easy to understand. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, but the present invention is not limited to this. The symbol corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn.

Furthermore, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed in a small display area with an inconspicuous symbol similar to the second display area Dn. Alternatively, it may be configured to be displayed by an LED display without being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the effect display of the probabilistic period rather than the variable display of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the feeling of complicated playability. In the case of displaying by LED display or the like, for example, a plurality of petals may be lit by LEDs, and a combination of the lighting may be configured to notify the success / failure determination. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the LED corresponds to the second special symbol, and the player can concentrate on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 (b) to 64 (c) and 65, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 2 to 4 will be described. FIG. 64 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2, the probability that a deviation is selected is lower than that of the above-mentioned deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1, while super reach and long reach 1 , The difference is that the probability that the long reach 2 is selected is high. In addition, the number of transitions is set to 20 times, which is doubled (see FIG. 63 (b)). That is, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (a)) has a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (b)). Since the variation pattern is easily selected, the probabilistic game state is likely to be continued for a long time, which is set in an advantageous manner for the player. Therefore, the size of the value that is advantageous to the player can be changed depending on the table selected from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)), and it is possible to predict which table is selected by the player. , You can expect a better table to be selected.

FIG. 64 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3. This deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is set to have a lower probability that the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64 (b)) is deviated and normal reach is selected. On the other hand, Super Reach, Long Reach 1, and Long Reach 2 are set with a high probability of being selected. Further, the number of transitions is set to 30 times, which is larger than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. That is, the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is configured to have a longer probability variation period than the disengagement (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 2, and is set as a table advantageous to the player. There is.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4. In this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4, the probability that the deviation pattern of deviation and normal reach is selected is set lower than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3, and the super The probability that reach and long reach 2 are selected is set high, and instead of long reach 1, the fluctuation pattern of long reach 3 composed of 1200 seconds, which has a longer fluctuation time than long reach 2, is out of order (probability change). 1 It is set to be selected with a higher probability than the long reach 2 of the variable transition table 3. In addition, the number of transitions is set to 100, which is larger than that of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3.

Therefore, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 is configured so that the variation pattern having the longest fluctuation time can be easily selected from the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. , The probabilistic game state is configured to be easy to continue for the longest time. Therefore, it is configured as the most advantageous table for the player.

In addition, this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 wins a small hit when any of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is determined, and further shift counter. The value of is configured to be selected only with a probability of any of 0 to 10, that is, 11/199. Therefore, since the determination is made only infrequently for the player, it is possible to suppress a problem that the damage on the game store side becomes excessively large. Further, in the state where the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 are set, the player has a high expectation for the small hit, and the player can expect the hit / fail determination result other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) of one process in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) is the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230). It differs in that it has been changed to. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, their illustration and description will be omitted.

The first special symbol change start processing 2 (S230) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 2 (S230).

In the first special symbol change start processing 2 (FIG. 66, S230), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S311). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S312). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S312: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1. S313). It is determined whether the value of the transition count counter (not shown) is greater than 0 (S314).

Here, the transition count counter is set to the number of transitions (see FIG. 63 (b)) set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figures 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 4. It is a counter for counting the number of transitions by being set and subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol is variablely displayed. In the initialized state, the transition count counter is set to 0, which is an initial value. In addition, when the power is cut off, the data is backed up and the count value is maintained for a certain period (for example, one week).

If it is determined that the value of the shift count counter is 0 (S314: No), the process proceeds to S318. When the value of the migration count counter is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the migration count is set (S314: Yes), the value of the migration counter is subtracted by 1 and updated (S315). .. It is determined whether the value of the updated migration count counter is 0 (S316). When it is determined that the value of the shift count counter is 0 (S316: Yes), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (normal table) is set (S317). After that, the process of S318 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S316 that the value of the transition count counter is greater than 0 (S316: No), the process of S318 is executed.

As described above, when the value of the shift count counter becomes 0, the normal table is set, so that the variable pattern selection table 202d determined by the shift count can be switched to the type and set. Further, since the number of transitions is set to be different depending on the set table, the player can enjoy different fluctuation pattern effects up to a different number of fluctuations.

In the process of S318, the data stored in the hold areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S318). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S319). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). Since the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) is the same process as the process already described in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S421). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (during probabilistic change) (S422). The determination of whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state is executed depending on whether or not the probabilistic variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state (during probability change)) (S422: Yes), a special hit is made based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value is determined, and the lottery result is acquired (S423). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S422: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (Fig. 10 (b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S424).

It is determined whether the jackpot flag 203o is on (S425). Here, when the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using this jackpot flag 203o in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation that becomes a jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is off in the processing of S425 (S425: No), then it is determined whether the winning / failing determination result in the processing of S423 and S424 is a jackpot (S426). If it is a jackpot (S426: Yes), the jackpot flag 203o is set to on for the first special symbol (S427), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S428). Then, a jackpot symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the hit type counter (S429).

On the other hand, in the process of S425, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on (S425: Yes), the process of S430 is executed. Further, in the process of S426, even when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination in the process of S423 and S424 is incorrect (S426: No), the process of S430 is executed.

In the process of S430, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a small hit (S430). If it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a small hit (S430: Yes), the small hit process is executed (S431). The details of this small hit process (S431) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the value of the migration counter (not shown) is acquired, and the migration destination table is determined based on the value. The process is executed.

After the process of S431 is executed, the first symbol display device 37 is set to display a symbol indicating a small hit of the first special symbol (S432). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S430, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is not a small hit, that is, it is a miss (S430: No), a symbol indicating the miss of the first special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. It is set to be displayed (S433). After that, this process ends.

In this way, even if the hit / fail judgment results of S423 and S424 are hit, if the jackpot flag 203o is already set to ON, it is not judged as a jackpot by the processing of S425, but is forcibly judged as a miss. Will be done. As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not fluctuate to become big hits at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the big hits from continuing in a short time.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed to be big hits at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are big hits at the same time. The variation may be configured to be performed. In such a configuration, in the probabilistic gaming state, the period of the actual probabilistic gaming state can be set longer by configuring the fluctuation time for hitting the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol to be longer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a small hit process (S431), which is one process in the first special symbol big hit determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit process (S431).

In the small hit process (FIG. 68, S431), first, the value of the transition counter is acquired (S441). Here, the transition counter (not shown) is set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and is added and updated by 1 each time the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) is executed. This transition counter is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198", and is set to "0", which is the initial value, in the initialized state.

When the process of S441 is executed, the migration destination table is the migration counter from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63 (b)) based on the value of the migration counter, and whether or not the currently selected first special symbol is correct or not. It is selected based on the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d that is referred to when the determination result is out of order (S442). S442 sets a migration command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the type of the selected migration destination table (S443). After that, this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, a lottery for switching the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is wrong is executed. When the change of the variation pattern selection table 202d is determined, the table is set for the set number of transitions. After that, when the set number of transitions is executed, a predetermined variation pattern selection table 202d (in the present embodiment, a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 63 (c))). Can be switched to.

As a result, the player can expect not only to obtain a prize ball by the small hit game but also to switch the variable pattern selection table 202d when the small hit is won. Further, since the magnitude of the value obtained differs depending on the type of the switched variation pattern selection table 202d, it is possible to be interested in the type and improve the taste of the game.

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually acquired is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to on, that is, by the second special symbol. When the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started, the setting of the deviation is forcibly executed by the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits are not executed at the same time, and the fluctuations that become big hits are continuously started in a short period of time, and the game store side. It is possible to suppress the problem that the damage becomes excessive.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. In the first embodiment described above, in the probabilistic game state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to fluctuate at the same time, and the fluctuation time of the hit / fail determination result that is out of the first special symbol is set to the second special symbol. By configuring the fluctuation time to be extremely long with respect to the fluctuation time, it is configured to execute an effect of notifying the fluctuation period of the first special symbol as a period during which the probability variation game state continues. Further, when the fluctuation that hits the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly started (executed) by the fluctuation that is out of alignment.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, if the second special symbol is out of the game, the probability of winning the small hit is set high, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol that becomes the small hit is set. Is configured so that it can fluctuate even when the fluctuation that is a hit in the first special symbol is started. With this configuration, even if the change of the jackpot A that shifts to the normal game state is started in the first special symbol, the small hit game is started by winning the small hit within the fluctuation period. Then, a prize ball can be given to the player to improve the player's interest. The differences from the first embodiment will be illustrated and described, and the illustration and description will be omitted for the same configuration as the first embodiment.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in the configuration of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69A is a schematic view showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that the content of the variation pattern selection table 202d is changed and the small hit random number table 202e is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202e of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. In the present embodiment, as a determination value for performing a lottery of a special symbol, a small hit determination value that is a small hit is set among the determination values set as a non-big hit loss. When the small hit determination value and the acquired first hit random number counter C1 value match, a small hit is set as the lottery result of the special symbol. In the small hit game executed when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 3 seconds is executed twice. When a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the same prize ball (for example, 15 balls) as in the jackpot game is paid out to the player for each ball. As a result, the opening period is shorter than the jackpot game, and the number of rounds (opening times) is also small, so the number of prize balls that the player can obtain is small, but a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than if it is out of the game is given. Will be done.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the normal gaming state, the small hit determination value is not set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the probabilistic game state, although the small hit determination value is not set for the first special symbol, "10 to 109" is set as the small hit determination value for the second special symbol. There is. Therefore, with respect to 400 random numbers of the first random number counter C1, 100 are set as small hit determination values, so that the small hit is won with a probability of 1/4. As a result, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, a small hit is likely to be given, and the player can be attracted to the lottery with the second special symbol.

FIG. 69 (c) shows a hit (probability change) feature used to select a variation pattern when the result of the hit / fail determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit in the probability change game state in the third embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table. In the third embodiment, the type of variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the probabilistic game state is different from that of the first embodiment. When the second special symbol is a small hit, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

In the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), when the determination result of the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a jackpot to which a probability variation game state is given. Is configured so that either a fluctuation pattern A having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or a fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 360 seconds is selected. Here, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set so that the variation pattern A (30 seconds) is easier to select than the variation pattern B (360 seconds). Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", the fluctuation pattern A (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "191 to 198", the fluctuation pattern A (30 seconds) is selected. Fluctuation pattern B (360 seconds) is selected. The details will be described later, but the jackpot (big hit A) to which the probabilistic game is given has a shorter fluctuation time (30 seconds or 360 seconds) than the jackpot (big hit B) to which the probabilistic game is not given. ) Is set so that it can be easily selected, so that it is possible to prevent the amusement store side from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit and the normal game state is given (probability change game is not given) and the hit type (big hit B), the fluctuation pattern C with a fluctuation time of 360 seconds and 720 seconds Either one of the fluctuation pattern D of is selected. Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", the fluctuation pattern C (360 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "191 to 198", the fluctuation pattern C (360 seconds) is selected. Fluctuation pattern D (720 seconds) is selected. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot (big hit B) in which a normal game is given as a result of determining whether or not the first special symbol is correct, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the case where a probability variation game state is given. In the meantime, more prize balls can be given by winning a small hit in the second special symbol.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the game ball is allowed to flow down to the left flow path PA1 so that the game ball enters only the first starting port 64, which is the trigger for the lottery of the first special symbol. Left-handed game). Therefore, even if the game shifts to the probabilistic game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port 640, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, than the first start port 64, a maximum of four reserved balls are the first. It may be remembered for a special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot, which is in the normal gaming state with the first special symbol, is won at an early stage, there is a problem that the player is excessively disadvantaged. However, in the configuration of the third embodiment, even if the jackpot fluctuation that shifts to the normal gaming state is started in the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is set to be relatively long (360 seconds or 720 seconds). In the meantime, you can get a prize ball by winning a small hit with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
The control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. In the control process of the third embodiment, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIGS. 27, S705) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the second special symbol jackpot determination process with respect to the control process of the first embodiment. 2 (FIGS. 70, S705), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S706) is added to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 71, S706), and the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) is changed to the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (FIG. 72, S207). For other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705) is different in that the small hit is selected as the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S705), first, the processes S801 to S806 are executed in the same manner as in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S805, when the jackpot flag 203o is off for the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S805: No and S806: No). , The processes S807 to S809 are executed in the same manner as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S805 that the jackpot flag 203o is on with respect to the special figure 1 (S805: Yes), it is a case where the fluctuation which becomes the jackpot in the special figure 1 is started. In this case, in order to prevent the jackpot from being set as the lottery result of the special figure 2, the process proceeds to S851. Not limited to this, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on for the special figure 1 (that is, when the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot is started in the special figure 1), S802 to S804 The process (the process of acquiring the lottery result) may not be executed. Thereby, the processing load for executing the processing of S802 to S804 (processing of acquiring the lottery result) can be reduced.

Further, in the process of S806, even if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S806: No), the process proceeds to the process of S851. In the process of S851, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S851). In the process of S851, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S8511: No), it means that the lottery result is out of order. Similarly, the process of S810 is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the lottery result is a small hit (S851: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S852 in order to set a small hit as the lottery result of the special figure 2. Here, when the fluctuation that becomes the big hit of the special figure 1 is started, the small hit is set as the lottery result of the special figure 2 by shifting to the processing of S851. In the small hit game of the special figure 2, the game ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a, and the prize ball can be obtained based on the winning. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that is the jackpot in FIG. 1 is configured to be longer (30 seconds or 360 seconds) than that in the first embodiment. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to the normal gaming state after that, that is, even if the change of the big hit of the special figure 1 which is disadvantageous to the player is started, the small hit is won by the second special symbol during that time. You can get a prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

In the process of S852, the special figure 2 lottery result is set as a small hit (S852). Next, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S853), and this process is completed.

Next, the details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S706) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S706). In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2, the variation pattern based on the small hit when the lottery result is a small hit with respect to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that it is configured to set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S706), first, the process of S901 is executed in the same manner as the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28). In the process of S901, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit (S901: Yes), from S902, S903 and S905 as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 28). The process of S907 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is not a big hit (S901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (S951). .. In the process of S951, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S951: No), the lottery result is out of order. , The process of S904 is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S905.

If the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the process of S951 (S951: Yes), a small hit variation pattern selection table (not shown) according to the gaming state is set (S952). Then, the small hit type is selected from the small hit type table (not shown) (S953), and the process proceeds to S905. When the processing of S905 to S907 is completed, the main processing is completed. Since the processing of S905 to S907 is the same as the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 28), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit variation pattern selection table set by the process of S952 is a table in which the variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected, although not shown. By setting the small hit variation pattern selection table (not shown) by the process of S952, the variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected in the process of S905.

Further, the small hit type table in the processing of S953 is a table in which only the small hit A is specified as the small hit type, although the illustration is omitted. As a result, in the process of S953, the small hit A is selected as the small hit type. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hits may be provided as a small hit type. For example, a small hit A in which a prize ball is easily obtained in a small hit game and a small hit B in which a prize ball is difficult to be obtained (or cannot be obtained) are provided. As a result, the player pays attention to which small hit game is executed, so that the player's interest can be improved. Of course, the selected small hit type may be changed according to the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S207) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S207). In the second special fluctuation stop processing 2 (S207), a process for stopping the fluctuation in which the lottery result is a small hit is added to the second special fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. It differs in that it is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S207), first, the processes S1001 to S1004 are executed in the same manner as in the second special fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29). Then, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose variable time has ended is not a big hit (S1004: No), then whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose variable time has ended is a small hit. Whether or not it is determined (S1051). In the process of S1051, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose fluctuation time has ended is a small hit (S1051: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S1052). The start of the small hit is set (S1053), and the process proceeds to S1011. By executing the process of S1053, the small hit game is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1051, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose variable time has ended is not a small hit (S1051: No), the lottery result of the special figure 2 whose variable time has ended is out of order. Therefore, the processing of S1052 and S1053 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S1011. Since the processing after S1011 is the same as the second special fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, if the second special symbol is out of the game, the probability of winning the small hit is set high, and the second special symbol becomes a small hit. The fluctuation of is configured so that it can be changed even when the fluctuation that is a hit in the first special symbol is started. With this configuration, even if the change of the jackpot A that shifts to the normal game state is started in the first special symbol, the small hit game is started by winning the small hit within the fluctuation period. And since the prize ball can be given to the player, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, even if the player shifts to the probabilistic game state, a maximum of four reserved balls may be stored for the first special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot, which is in the normal gaming state with the first special symbol, is won at an early stage, there is a problem that the player is excessively disadvantaged. However, in the configuration of the third embodiment, even if the fluctuation of the jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state is started in the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is set to be relatively long, and the small hit is set in the meantime. 2 You can get a prize ball by winning with a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that causes the player to be excessively disadvantageous.

When the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation that is a big hit in the first special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) or stopped (forced stop). Thereby, based on the fact that the second special symbol becomes a small hit, the period until the big hit of the first special symbol occurs, that is, the period in which the probabilistic gaming state is generated can be lengthened. Therefore, the player can be made to play with the expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a small hit, so that the player's interest can be improved. Further, in this case, since the period of the probabilistic game state can be extended by making a small hit with the second special symbol, the prize ball cannot be obtained (or gained) in the small hit game based on the second special symbol. It may be configured to reduce the number of prize balls received). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive loss from occurring on the amusement store side.

In the present embodiment, only one type of small hit game (small hit type) shown in FIG. 2 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be provided. For example, a small hit A in which a prize ball is obtained by a small hit game and a small hit B in which a prize ball cannot be obtained (or is difficult to obtain) by a small hit game may be provided. Which small hit is given may be randomly determined or may be determined according to the gaming state. As a result, when the lottery result is a small hit, the player pays attention to whether or not a small hit for obtaining a prize ball is given, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, similarly to the second embodiment described above, it is natural that the variation pattern selection table of the special figure 1 may be switched when the small hit of the special figure 2 is obtained. Further, it may be as follows. In the probability change game state (high probability state of a special symbol), the state is changed (for example, changed to the latent probability change state) after a predetermined number of lottery is executed. Then, the variation pattern selection table of the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2) may be switched when the state is changed. For example, after the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times in the probabilistic game state, the game shifts to the latent probabilistic state and switches to the variation pattern selection table in which the variation time of the special figure 1 becomes longer (that is, advantageous for the player). do. Alternatively, the state shifts to the latent probability variation state, and the variation pattern selection table in which the variation time of the special figure 1 is shortened (that is, disadvantageous to the player) is switched. As a result, the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times in the probabilistic game state, so that the state can be changed to an advantageous (or disadvantageous) state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the gaming state and improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state is configured to continue until the next jackpot occurs, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the probabilistic gaming state may be set until the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (or one of them) reaches a predetermined number of times. As a result, even when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 does not occur (for example, when a fraudulent act is executed to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting port 64), the probability change game state is set to a predetermined number of times. Since the lottery ends when the lottery is completed, it is possible to suppress (prevent) excessive damage to the game store side.

Further, a distribution device may be provided so that the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2 is evenly (or at a predetermined ratio) a prize at the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640. As a result, in the probabilistic game state, the game ball wins only in the second start port 640, and the game ball does not win in the first start port (that is, the jackpot in Special Figure 1 does not occur), so that the probabilistic game state is changed. It is possible to suppress (prevent) problems that do not end. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) excessive damage to the amusement store side.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in the following points. In the first embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, when there is a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot B (normal jackpot) as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol (that is, based on the occurrence of the jackpot B of the first special symbol). (In the case of transitioning to the normal gaming state (so-called falling)), the period until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B starts is notified (directed) as the probability variation period (FIGS. 5 and 6). reference). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, when there is a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot A (probability change jackpot) as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol (that is, the probabilistic game state based on the first special symbol). Is continued (when it does not fall), the period until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A is started is set as a pseudo-notification (directing) as a probability variation period. This pseudo-notified probabilistic period is called a pseudo-probability period, and at the end of the pseudo-probability period, a revival effect suggesting that the probabilistic gaming state continues is executed (displayed). As a result, even after the end of the probability variation period (probability variation game state) is notified, the revival effect is displayed, and the player can be expected to continue the probability variation game state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. 73 (a) and 73 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the revival effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the fourth embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, the effect of notifying the period (pseudo-probability change period) until the fluctuation of the jackpot A (probability change jackpot) is started as the lottery result of the first special symbol is the above-mentioned first. The third symbol has the same display mode as the effect of notifying the period (probability variation period) until the fluctuation of the jackpot B (normal jackpot) is started as the lottery result of the first special symbol executed (displayed) in one embodiment. It is displayed on the display device 81 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the player recognizes that the remaining time until the end of the probability change displayed at the upper part of the screen is the remaining time until the end of the probability change period in the effect of notifying the pseudo probability change period.

Then, at the end timing of the pseudo-probability change period (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A starts), the remaining time until the end of the probabilistic change is displayed as 0 seconds (see FIG. 6B). As a result, it is recognized that the fluctuation to be started becomes the jackpot B (normal jackpot), and then shifts to the low probability state (time saving game state).

However, the actual probability variation period has not ended, and a display period command (see S6105 in FIG. 77) indicating a revival effect is set at the end timing of the pseudo probability variation period. By the display period command indicating this revival effect, the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and the characters "Resurrection addition chance !!" (Resurrection effect) are displayed in the center part of the screen (Fig.). 73 (a)). As a result, even though the player recognizes that the probability change period has expired, by notifying the player that the probability change period is continuously executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and the player's interest can be enjoyed. Can be improved.

After this revival effect is displayed, an effect that suggests the remaining time (addition time) of the probability variation period (or an effect that suggests the remaining time of the pseudo probability variation period) based on the stored prize information of Special Figure 1 is displayed. ) Is executed (displayed) (see FIG. 73 (b)). As a result, the player pays attention to the remaining time (addition time) of the probability change period displayed after the revival effect, and the player's interest can be improved. The above-mentioned revival effect is not limited to the end of the pseudo probability variation period, and may be configured to be displayed at the end of the probability variation period. In this case, 0 seconds may be displayed as the remaining time (addition time) of the probability variation period after the revival effect.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table, which is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d provided in the ROM 202, are changed with respect to the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table. The hit (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table is a table used to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The fluctuation pattern type is selected based on the jackpot type and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this hit (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table, fluctuation pattern E with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds are selected as fluctuation patterns when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot (big hit A). A variation pattern F of 30 seconds is defined. Further, as the fluctuation patterns selected when the lottery result is a normal jackpot (big hit B), a fluctuation pattern G with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, a fluctuation pattern H with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and a fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are selected. Pattern I is defined.

These fluctuation patterns are selected in the process of S505 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 24) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot (big hit A) and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", the variation pattern E (0.5 seconds) is selected and the variation type. When the value of the counter CS1 is "191 to 198", the fluctuation pattern F (30 seconds) is selected. If the lottery result is a normal jackpot (big hit B) and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 10", the variation pattern G (10 seconds) is selected and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When it is "11 to 150", the fluctuation pattern H (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "151 to 198", the fluctuation pattern I (60 seconds) is selected.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The RAM 223 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p is newly provided, and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Whether or not the revival flag 223n is performing an effect of notifying the period (pseudo-probability change period) until the fluctuation of the jackpot A (probability change jackpot) is started as the lottery result of the first special symbol in the probability change game state. It is a flag for discriminating. This revival flag 223n is turned on when the notification effect of the time (pseudo-probability change period) until the jackpot A of the special figure 1 is started is executed (displayed) in the probability change period notification process 2 (FIG. 76) described later. It is set (see S6005 in FIG. 76). Then, in the period setting process (see FIG. 77), when the notification of the pseudo-probability change period is finished and the display period command indicating the resurrection effect for executing (displaying) the resurrection effect is set, it is set to off. (See S6106 in FIG. 77).

The pseudo-probability change period storage area 223p is an area for storing the period (time) until the fluctuation of the jackpot A (probability change jackpot) is started as the lottery result of the first special symbol in the probabilistic game state. In the pseudo-probability change period storage area 223p, a value indicating the time until the jackpot A of special figure 1 is started is set in the probability change period notification process 2 (FIG. 76) described later (see S6006 in FIG. 76). Then, in the period setting process (see FIG. 77), the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p is updated (subtracted) (see S6102 in FIG. 77), and a display period command for notifying the pseudo probability variation period is set. (S6103 in FIG. 77). Further, when the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p becomes 0, a display period command indicating the resurrection effect for executing (displaying) the resurrection effect is set (see S6105 in FIG. 77).

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the main process (see FIG. 45) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The probabilistic period notification process (S1414), which is one of the processes in (), is changed to the probabilistic period notification process 2 (S1451), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the probability variation period notification process 2 (S1451) will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the probability change period notification process 2 (S1451). In the probability variation period notification process 2, in addition to the process of notifying the period (probability variation period) until the jackpot B of the special figure 1 is started, which is executed in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot A of the special figure 1 is It is configured to execute a process of notifying the period until the start (pseudo probability variation period).

In the probabilistic period notification process 2 (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probabilistic gaming state (S6001). If it is determined in the process of S6001 that the gaming state is not the probabilistic gaming state (S6001: No), neither the probabilistic period nor the pseudo-probability period is notified, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6001, when it is determined that the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state (S6001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the resurrection flag 223n is on (S6002). In the process of S6002, when it is determined that the resurrection flag 223n is on (S6002: Yes), it means that the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period is being executed (displayed), and the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period is being executed. Is executed (displayed), the process proceeds to S6009.

On the other hand, in the process of S6002, when it is determined that the resurrection flag 223n is off (S6002: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6003. In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit of the special figure 1 in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k (S6003). In the processing of S6003, if it is determined that there is no jackpot of special figure 1 in the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k (S6003: No), the jackpot B even if all the stored fluctuations of special figure 1 are completed. (Normal jackpot) does not occur, that is, there is no transition to the normal gaming state. In this case, the stored value indicating the total fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set in the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i (S6008), and the process proceeds to S6009. With the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i set in the process of S6008 as the upper limit value, an effect of notifying the probability variation period is executed (displayed) in the period setting process (S6009) described later.

In the processing of S6003, if it is determined that the subordinate sort hold storage area 223k has the jackpot of special figure 1 (S6003: Yes), the last of the stored jackpots (the order of winning is the newest). It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special figure 1 is the jackpot A (S6004). In the processing of S6004, when it is determined that the last jackpot of special figure 1 (the order of winning is the newest) is jackpot A among the stored jackpots (S6004: Yes), the special figure 1 This is a case where the probabilistic gaming state continues (does not fall into the normal gaming state) even after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed. In this case, the process shifts to the process of S6005 in order to notify the period until the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the jackpot A is started as the pseudo probability variation period.

In the process of S6005, the resurrection flag 223n is set to ON in order to make it possible to determine that the notification of the pseudo probability variation period is being executed (S6005). Then, the time until the last memorized jackpot A of the special figure 1 (the order of winning is the newest) is set in the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p (S6006), and the process proceeds to S6009. ..

In the present embodiment, the period (time) until the final jackpot A of Special Figure 1 (the order of winning is the newest) is set and notified, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, the notification of the pseudo probability variation period is terminated before the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds before) the jackpot A of the special figure 1 is started, and another effect (for example, an effect suggesting the end of the probability variation period) is performed at the predetermined time. May be done. Further, the period until the fluctuation based on the reserved ball before the jackpot A of the special figure 1 (for example, one before) may be set (notified) as the pseudo probability variation period. As a result, even after the end of the probability change period is notified, the player can play the game with the expectation that the revival effect will be displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, the revival effect may be configured to be displayed based on the game ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a. As a result, the revival effect is displayed after it is confirmed that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a and the probability variation game state is given (that is, the probability variation period is extended). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the inconsistency that the game ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a and the probability variation period is not extended even though the revival effect is displayed. The method for suppressing (preventing) the above-mentioned inconsistency is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a after the resurrection effect is displayed, an effect (for example, a resurrection failure effect) for notifying that the probability variation period is not extended is executed. It may be configured.

In the processing of S6004, when it is determined that the last jackpot of special figure 1 (the order of winning is the newest) is jackpot B among the stored jackpots (S6004: No), the special figure 1 This is a case where the probability variation game state ends (falls to the normal game state) after the jackpot game based on the jackpot B is executed. In this case, in order to notify the period until the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the first (oldest winning order) jackpot B among the stored jackpots is started, as the probability variation period, S6007 Move to processing.

In the processing of S6007, the time until the start of the first stored jackpot B of the special figure 1 (the order of winning is the oldest) is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i (S6007), and the processing of S6009 is performed. Move to. With the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i set in the process of S6007 as the upper limit value, an effect of notifying the probability variation period is executed (displayed) in the period setting process (S6009) described later.

In the present embodiment, the time until the first jackpot B of the first stored (the oldest winning order) special figure 1 is started is set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i. It is not limited to. For example, the time until the last memorized jackpot B of the special figure 1 (the order of winning is the newest) may be set in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i. As a result, even if the first (oldest winning order) jackpot B in special figure 1 shifts (falls) to the normal gaming state, then the last (newest winning order) jackpot B in special figure 1 Is started, it is possible to give the player the impression that the probabilistic game state (probability change period) is being continued. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the pachinko machine 10 is given a probabilistic game state (probability change period) for a long period of time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

When the processing of S6002, S6006, S6007 or S6008 is completed, the period setting process is executed (S6009), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the period setting process (S6009) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the period setting process (S6009). This period setting process (S6009) is a process for notifying the pseudo probability change period or the probability change period set in the above-mentioned probability change period notification process 2 (S1451).

In the period setting process (S6009), first, it is determined whether or not the resurrection flag 223n is on (S6101). If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the resurrection flag 223n is ON (S6101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6102 in order to notify the pseudo-probability change period.

In the process of S6102, the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p is updated (subtracted) (S6102). Then, the display period command corresponding to the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p is set (S6103), and the process proceeds to the process of S6104.

In the process of S6104, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p updated (subtracted) in the process of S6102 is 0, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the pseudo probability variation period (S6104). .. If it is determined in the process of S6104 that the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p is larger than 0 (not 0) (S6104: No), it is not the end timing of the pseudo probability variation period, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6104, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo probability variation period storage area 223p is 0 (S6104: Yes), it is the end timing of the pseudo probability variation period, so that the end of the pseudo probability variation period is notified. Then, the process proceeds to S6105.

In the process of S6105, a display period command indicating the revival effect is set (S6105). Then, the revival flag 223n is set to off (S6106), and this process ends. The display period command indicating the revival effect set in the process of S6105 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. ), It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display period command indicating the resurrection effect, the display control device 114 displays the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 73 on the third symbol display device 81. Not limited to this, the revival effect may be executed after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A of Special Figure 1 is completed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the revival effect is displayed until the jackpot game after the end of the probability change period is notified, and the player's interest can be improved.

If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the resurrection flag 223n is not on (S6101: No), the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is updated (subtracted) (S6107). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is larger than 0 (S6108). In the processing of S6108, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is larger than 0 (S6108), then the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j (the time notified as the probability variation period) is added. Whether or not it is determined (S6109). In the process of S6109, when the game ball enters the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, it is determined that it is an additional trigger. Therefore, based on the game ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, the process shifts to the process of S6110 described later, and the remaining time of the probability variation period is added (added) and displayed. As a result, by allowing the player to insert the game ball into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, the remaining time of the probability variation period is added (added), that is, the probability variation period is extended. It is possible to give the impression that. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball.

If it is determined in the processing of S6109 that it is not an additional trigger (S6109: No), a display period effect command corresponding to the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j updated (subtracted) in the processing of S6107 is set (S6109: No). S6114), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6109, if it is determined that the trigger is an addition (S6109: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6110 in order to add the displayed probability variation period. In S6110, the addition time is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the addition time selection table 222b (S6110). Then, the addition time selected by the process of S6110 is added to the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j (S6111). In the process of S6111, when the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j after addition is larger than the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i, the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is set as the upper limit value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification of a probability change period longer than the actual probability change period.

It should be noted that the probability variation period longer than the actual probability variation period is not set (notified), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation period longer than the actual probability variation period may be set (notified). .. In this case, the subtraction time may be configured so that the probability variation period is subtracted in the processing of S6110. As a result, in addition to the case where the probability variation period is added, the case where the probability variation period is subtracted can be provided, and the variation of the production can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the process of S6108, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation period storage area 223j is 0 (S6108: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S6112). ). In the processing of S6112, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is larger than 0 (S6112: Yes), until the probability variation period actually ends (until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B starts). Since there is still a period remaining, the process shifts to the process of S6110 in order to add and display the remaining time of the probability variation period regardless of whether or not it is an additional opportunity.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6112, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is 0 (S6112: No), the timing at which the probability variation period actually ends (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B starts). ), The display period command corresponding to the value (0) of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i is set as it is (S6114), and this process is terminated. In the process of S6114, by setting the display period command corresponding to the value (0) of the probability variation upper limit value storage area 223i, an effect suggesting that the probability variation period has ended is produced as shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when there is a reserved ball that becomes a jackpot A (probability variation jackpot) as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation game state (that is, based on the first special symbol). Even when the probabilistic game state continues (does not fall), the period until the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A starts is pseudo-notified (directed) as the probabilistic period. At the end of this pseudo-probability change period, a resurrection effect suggesting that the probabilistic game state continues is executed (displayed). As a result, even after the end of the probability variation period (probability variation game state) is notified, the revival effect is displayed, and the player can be expected to continue the probability variation game state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the revival effect is displayed at the end of the pseudo-probability change period, but the revival effect may be displayed based on the game ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a. .. As a result, the revival effect is displayed after it is confirmed that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a and the probability variation game state is given (that is, the probability variation period is extended). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the inconsistency that the game ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a and the probability variation period is not extended even though the revival effect is displayed. The method for suppressing (preventing) the above-mentioned inconsistency is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a after the resurrection effect is displayed, an effect (for example, a resurrection failure effect) for notifying that the probability variation period is not extended is executed. It may be configured.

In the present embodiment, even if there is a prize of jackpot B as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol while executing (displaying) the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period, the effect of notifying the pseudo-probability change period. Is configured so as to continue (does not switch to the effect of notifying the probability change period). As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the revival effect is executed (displayed) after the notification of the pseudo-probability change period is completed. Not limited to this, if there is a prize of jackpot B as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol while executing (displaying) the effect of notifying the pseudo probability change period, the probability change period is notified. It may be configured to switch to the production. In this case, the probability variation period (until the start of the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot B that occurs after the jackpot A) that is longer than the pseudo probability variation period (until the start of the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot A) is displayed as the remaining time of the probability variation period. .. As a result, the gaming machine is displayed with a long remaining time of the probabilistic variation period, so that the player can be given the impression that the probabilistic gaming state is continuous for a long time.

In the present embodiment, a case of notifying the period (probability change period) of the probabilistic game state and a case of pseudo-notifying the probabilistic game state are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a case of notifying the period (time saving period) in which the time-saving game state is provided and a case of notifying in a pseudo manner may be provided. Specifically, as the jackpot (may be a small hit) type of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (which may be a small hit A) at which the time-saving game state is terminated and the jackpot B (small hit) where the time-saving game state is continued are continued. B may be provided). The period until the change of the jackpot A (the time-saving game state is terminated) is notified as the time-saving period, and the period until the change of the jackpot B (the time-saving game state is continued) is simulated. It is configured to notify as a short period of time. Then, at the end of the pseudo time-short period, the revival effect suggesting that the time-saving game state continues may be executed (displayed). As a result, even after the end of the time saving period (time saving game state) is notified, the revival effect is displayed, and the player can be expected to continue the time saving game state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, based on the fluctuation of the small hit (or big hit) based on the second special symbol (when the fluctuation starts or stops), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be configured to notify the period of temporary suspension (temporary suspension period). Then, the temporary stop period may be pseudo-notified, and the revival effect may be executed (displayed) at the end of the temporary stop period. It should be noted that the above-mentioned temporary stop period, the time saving period, and the probability change period may all be displayed (notified), or any two of them may be displayed (notified) in combination.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

<Characteristic A group> (Make it difficult to win Special Figure 1 with electric support)
The game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entrance, the second entry port different from the first entry port, and the second entry port. The movable piece has a movable piece that can be moved into a first state and a second state that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance than the first state. By being moved to one state, the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first entrance is narrower than in the second state. Game machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first entry port into which a game ball can enter and a second entry port are provided. Due to the movable change, the first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance, and the state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter in the second entrance than in the first state. It is moved to the second state. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first entry port is narrower than in the second state. As a result, it becomes difficult to enter one of the entrances, so that the interest of the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path in which a game ball easily enters the first entry port and a second flow path in which the game ball easily enters the second entry port rather than the first flow path. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the game ball can easily flow down the second flow path, and the game can be played more than when the first flow path is in the second state. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it regulates the amount of flow of a ball.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first flow path in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry port and a second flow path in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry port are provided. There is. By moving the movable change to the first state, the game ball can easily flow down the second flow path, and the amount of the game ball flowing down the first flow path is regulated as compared with the case where the game ball flows down in the second state. .. This has the effect of efficiently reducing the amount of balls entering the first ball entry port.

In the game machine A1 or the game machine A2, based on the game ball entering the first entrance, the hit / fail determination of the first lottery game is executed, and the game ball enters the second entrance. Based on the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game and the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means, the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. It is characterized by having a game state determining means for determining either of the special gaming states, and a gaming state setting means for setting the normal gaming state or the special gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means. The gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the hit / fail determination means, the hit / fail judgment of the first lottery game is executed based on the game ball entering the first entry slot, and the game ball enters the second entry slot. Then, the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game is executed. Based on the determination of winning by the hit / fail determination means, either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means. The normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determining means is set by the game state setting means. As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a special game state will be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine A3, the gaming state setting means sets, as the special gaming state, a higher probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determining means than in the case of the normal gaming state. Machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, as a special gaming state, the probability of being determined as a hit by the winning / failing determination means is set higher by the state setting means than in the normal gaming state. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the gaming state determining means determines the normal gaming state and the special gaming state based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Either one is determined, and the ratio of determining the normal gaming state and the special gaming state is different between the first entrance and the second entrance. A featured gaming machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the normal gaming state is based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance by the gaming state determining means. And the special gaming state are determined, and the ratio of determining the normal gaming state and the special gaming state is different between the first entrance and the second entrance, so that the second entry is determined. There is an effect that the lottery can be expected to be executed at the ball mouth.

In the gaming machine A5, the gaming state determining means determines the normal gaming state when the gaming ball enters the first entrance, rather than when the gaming ball enters the second entrance. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being easy to play.

According to the gaming machine A6, when the gaming ball enters the first entrance, the normal gaming state is more likely to be determined by the gaming state determining means than when the gaming ball enters the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continuously play the special game state.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there is a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. However, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the privilege granting means grants a privilege having a different size between the first entrance and the second entrance.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Benefits of different sizes are given by the privilege giving means between the first entrance and the second entrance. This has the effect that more benefits can be given to the player.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable determining means for determining whether or not to move the movable piece from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the special gaming state The gaming machine A8 is characterized by having a movable rate setting means for easily determining that the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state by the movable determining means when set. ..

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, it is determined whether or not the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state by the movable determination means. When the special gaming state is set, it is easily determined by the movable rate setting means that the movable piece is moved from the second state to the second state by the movable determining means. This has the effect that the interest of the game can be easily changed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, based on a launching means capable of launching a game ball, an adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the launching means based on the player's operation, and a player's first operation. The first flow-down area where the game ball launched by the adjusting means adjusted by the firing force flows down, and the game ball launched by the adjusting means based on the second operation of the player flows down. It has a game area in which a second flow area different from the first flow area is formed, and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow area is configured to be able to enter only the first entry port. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow-down region is configured to be able to enter the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means. The firing force of the launching means is adjusted to the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first flow-down area in which the game ball launched by the firing force launched by the launching force adjusted by the adjusting means based on the player's first operation flows down, and the adjusting means based on the player's second operation. A second flow-down region in which the game ball launched by the firing force adjusted by the ball flows down is formed in the game region. The game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry port, and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area enters the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, respectively. It is configured to be possible. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem of getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine A9, as the first entry port, a common first entry port is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area can enter, and the second flow-down area. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that at least a one-sided first entry port into which only a gaming ball that has flowed down the area can enter is arranged.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, a common first ball that has flowed down the first flow-down area or the second flow-down area is arranged at a position where the ball can enter as the first entry port. Since at least the entry port and the first entry port on one side on which the game ball that has flowed down the second flow area can enter are arranged, there is an effect that the interest can be effectively changed depending on the game state.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first ball entry port is arranged below the second ball entry port, and the movable piece is moved to the first state, so that the movable piece is movable. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the passage of the gaming ball through the flow path capable of entering the first ball entry port is restricted by the piece as compared with the second state.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entry port is arranged below the second ball entry port. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the passage of the game ball through the flow path where the movable piece can enter the first ball entrance is restricted as compared with the second state. This has the effect that the inflow amount of the game ball can be easily changed.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, based on the special gaming state being set by the gaming state setting means, the movable piece is set to be more easily movable to the second state than the normal gaming state. A game machine A12 characterized by having a setting means.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, the movable piece is made more than the normal gaming state by the movable setting means based on the fact that the special gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Since it is set to be easily movable in the second state, it is possible to set a period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, the movable piece has a passage port through which the game ball can pass, and the movable piece has a passage gate in which the lottery condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the passage port. In the case of the two states, a common flow path, which is a flow path through which the game ball can enter, is formed at the passage gate or the first entry port, and is moved to the first state. It is characterized in that the entry of the game ball into the first entry port is restricted by the movable piece, and a single flow path, which is a flow path through which the game ball enters the passage gate, is formed. A13 game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a passage gate is provided which has a passage port through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the passage port. When the movable piece is in the second state, a common flow path, which is a flow path through which the game ball can enter, is formed at the passing gate or the first entry port. When the movable piece is moved to the first state, the movable piece regulates that the game ball enters the first entry port, and the single flow path, which is the flow path for the game ball to enter the passing gate, is formed. It is formed. This has the effect that the player can play the game advantageously.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A12, the first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game by the winning / failing determination means and the second identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the second lottery game are simultaneously displayed. The gaming machine A14, characterized in that it has a display control means capable of being displayed by the means.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A3 to A13, the first identification information indicating the winning / failing judgment result of the first lottery game by the winning / failing determination means and the winning / failing judgment result of the second lottery game are shown. Since the second identification information is simultaneously sent to the display means by the display control means, the player can be made to play the game efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic B group> (Freeze production produces the probability change period in time)
Based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game is executed, and the winning / failing determination means. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the second lottery game on the display means at the same time. , Dynamically determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods, respectively. At least one of the display period determining means, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the winning / failing judgment result is correct, and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given to the player. In a gaming machine having a privilege determining means for determining to be granted, the privilege determining means determines the second privilege based on the hit of the second lottery game rather than the hit of the first lottery game. The gaming machine B1 is easy to use, and has an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B1, the winning / failing determination means executes the winning / failing determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and executes the winning / failing determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. Will be done. The first identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the first lottery game by the winning / failing determination means and the second identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result of the second lottery game are dynamically displayed on the display means at the same time by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are set from a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. Each is decided. It is a privilege decision to give the player at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. Determined by means. The second privilege is more likely to be determined by the privilege determining means based on the winning of the second lottery game than the winning of the first lottery game. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period from a first dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period is divided into a plurality of dynamic display periods. The gaming machine B2, wherein the second dynamic display period is determined from the configured second dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first dynamic display period is determined from the first dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. Since the second dynamic display period is determined from the second dynamic display period group composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods, there is an effect that a variety of dynamic display periods can be selected. ..

In the gaming machine B2, the first motion of 1 is based on a storage means in which a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of the plurality of dynamic display periods are stored and a predetermined condition is satisfied from the storage means. It has a group determining means for determining a target display period group, and the dynamic display period determining means is one of the first dynamic display periods from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. The gaming machine B3, which is characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage means, one first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means. From the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means, the first dynamic display period of 1 is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. This has the effect that the game can be easily controlled.

In the gaming machine B3, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the target display period group is included.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups. Since the long first dynamic display period group that is easily configured is included, the number of times of the first lottery game can be reduced as compared with the number of times of the second lottery game, and a game that is more advantageous to the player can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to shift to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine B4, the group determining means is configured to be able to determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of the second privilege. Machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means based on the determination of the second privilege. It has the effect of improving.

A gaming machine B6, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the effect executing means displays the effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period on the display means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period is displayed on the display means by the effect executing means. Has the effect of improving.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means is set with a normal probability and a special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than the normal game state. The gaming state setting means for setting at least one of the gaming states and the privilege determining means include the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second benefits. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that at least one of them is determined.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, either the normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit / fail determination means is set with a normal probability or the special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than the normal game state is a game. It is set by the state setting means. At least one of a normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and a special gaming state as one of the second benefits is determined by the privilege determining means. This has the effect of further improving the enjoyment of the game.

Based on the setting of the special gaming state in any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period when the second dynamic display is determined. The gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is easy to determine a dynamic display period in which the dynamic display period is longer than the period.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the second dynamic display period is determined when the first dynamic display period is determined based on the setting of the special gaming state. Since the dynamic display period, which has a longer dynamic display period, is more likely to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means, there is an effect that an advantageous state can be provided to the player by further reducing the number of first lottery games. ..

In the gaming machine B7 or B8, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information used for the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means. A storage means for storing lottery information, a pre-winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination in advance before the winning / failing determination is made for the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the dynamic The pre-dynamic display period discriminating means for preliminarily determining the dynamic display period determined by the display period determining means, and the pre-dynamic display period determining means for determining the special gaming state when the special gaming state is determined. Based on the determination result, the effect executing means has a period determination means for determining the period until the normal gaming state is set, and the effect executing means performs the effect based on the information of the period determined by the period determination means. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the lottery information used for the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is acquired by the acquiring means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Prior to the winning / failing determination of the lottery information stored in the storage means, the winning / failing determination means is executed in advance by the winning / failing determination means. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is determined in advance by the pre-dynamic display period determining means. When the special game state is determined, the period until the normal game state is set by the period determination means is determined based on the determination result determined by the pre-dynamic display period determination means. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the period determined by the period determination means. This has the effect of further improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the lottery information to be a hit is stored as a result of the determination by the advance winning / failing determination means, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined in advance. The pre-game state determining means for determining is provided, and when the pre-game state determining means determines that the normal gaming state is determined, the normal gaming state is determined. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the effect is executed based on the information of the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance winning / failing determination means, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined in advance by the advance gaming state determining means. NS. When it is determined by the pre-game state determination means that the normal game state is determined, the effect is executed based on the information of the period until the dynamic display of the identification information for which the normal game state is determined is completed. The production is executed by means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the lottery information to be a hit is stored as a result of the determination by the advance winning / failing determination means, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined in advance. The pre-game state determination means for determining is provided, and when it is determined that the lottery information in the normal game state is not stored, the effect execution means stores the lottery information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that the effect is executed based on the information of the period within the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the above is completed.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance winning / failing determination means, the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined in advance by the advance gaming state determining means. NS. When it is determined that the lottery information in the normal gaming state is not stored, the information for the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is completed is used. Based on this, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a novel effect.

In any of the gaming machines B7 to B11, the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group when the special gaming state is set. B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B11, when a special gaming state is set, the first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means, so that the change It has the effect of being able to produce a rich variety of effects.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B12, the long first dynamic display period group is more likely to determine a longer dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups. A gaming machine B13 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B4 to B12, the dynamic display period longer than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups is longer by the dynamic display period determining means. Since it is easily determined from the group, there is an effect that it is easy for the player to set an advantageous state.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B13, a state setting means for setting at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is likely to be satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be satisfied than the first state. The gaming machine B14 is characterized in that the first privilege is configured so that the second state can be set more easily than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the state setting means sets at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is likely to be satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be satisfied than the first state. The first privilege is configured so that the second state can be set more easily than the second privilege. This has the effect of facilitating the setting of a state advantageous to the player and suppressing the problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

<Characteristic C group> (Freeze effect can be selected by switching the table when the probability change is medium or small)
A determination means for executing the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition and determining the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, and the first determination means by the determination means. A display control means capable of simultaneously displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the lottery game and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means, and the display control means dynamically. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the first dynamic display period determining means. After the 1 identification information or the second identification information is displayed as a determination result indicating a hit, at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. In a gaming machine having a privilege determining means for deciding to grant either one, the privilege determining means displays the second identification information as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. The second privilege is configured to be easier to determine, and the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods. A storage means in which a plurality of first dynamic display period groups are stored, and a group determining means for determining one of the first dynamic display period groups from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means. In the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period can be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The target display period group is included, and the group determining means may determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of a specific determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine C1, the determination means executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and executes the determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. The first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game are simultaneously displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are set from a plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining means. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed as a determination result indicating a hit, at least one of the first privilege that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. Granting either one is determined by the privilege determining means. When the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit, the second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determining means. As the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, a plurality of first dynamic display period groups composed of a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored by the storage means. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups include a long first dynamic display period group configured so that a first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period can be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determining means based on the determination of the specific determination result by the determining means. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel playability. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display period determining means is the first when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied. When the second dynamic display start condition for determining the dynamic display period and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied, the second dynamic display period is set respectively. A gaming machine that is determined individually and has an effect executing means that executes an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display period is determined when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied by the dynamic display period determining means. The second dynamic display period is determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a novel effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is characterized by having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination of the hit or the specific determination result by the determination means. Pachinko machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination of a hit or a specific determination result by the determining means is the privileged game executing means. Since it is executed by, there is an effect that the player can expect other than hitting.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, it is set with a normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the determination means is set with a normal probability, and a special probability with a higher probability of being determined to be a hit than the normal probability. It has a game state setting means for setting at least one of the special game states, and when the second privilege is determined, the special game state is set by the game state setting means as one of the second benefits. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that is configured to be easier to set than the first privilege.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of a normal gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the determination means is set by a normal probability and a special gaming state in which a special probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than the normal probability is set. Is set by the game state setting means. When the second privilege is determined, as one of the second privilege, the special game state is set more easily than the first privilege by the game state setting means. As a result, it is possible to set a more advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the determination means determines the specific determination result in the gaming machine C4 when the special gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, when the special gaming state is set, the determination means determines the specific determination result, so that the value of the special gaming state can be further increased. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the plurality of first dynamic display period groups include the first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group. A special length first dynamic display period group configured to be easily determined by the target display period determining means is included, and the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that when the specific determination is executed by the determination means, the special length first dynamic display period group can be determined.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, a first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The special length first dynamic display period group is included. When a specific determination is executed by the determination means when the long first dynamic display period group is determined, the special long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means. Thereby, the value of obtaining a specific determination result can be further increased. Therefore, in addition to the hit, there is an effect that it is possible to expect a specific determination result.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the group determining means determines the long first dynamic display period group, and then the first dynamic display is predetermined based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it determines a period group.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, after determining the long first dynamic display period group, it is predetermined by the group determining means based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Since the first dynamic display period group is determined, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the first privilege is configured so that the first state is set more easily by the state setting means than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and the second state in which the second lottery condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state are set by the state setting means. The first privilege is configured so that the first state is more easily set by the state setting means than the second privilege. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Characteristic D group> (Even if the normal hit is started in Special Figure 1, the number of balls will increase due to the small hit)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the first determination is executed, and based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination means for executing the second determination and the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means are displayed. The display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information to be shown and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination to the display means at the same time, and the display control means are dynamically displayed. A dynamic display period determining means for determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the first determination result. Alternatively, when the second determination result is a specific first determination result or the second determination result, a first privilege that is advantageous to the player and a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. In a gaming machine having a privilege determining means for determining to grant at least one of the above to the player, a dynamic display in which the first identification information indicating that the specific first determination result is displayed is displayed. The dynamic display regulating means that regulates the simultaneous dynamic display of the dynamic display that displays the second identification information indicating that the specific second determination result is obtained, and the specific second determination means by the discriminating means. When it is determined that the result is not the determination result, the special determination means for determining the establishment of the special second determination result that grants a special privilege different from the second privilege and the establishment of the special second determination result by the special determination means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a special dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating that is determined.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a special symbol winning lottery is performed, and a dynamic display for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. Is executed in. In addition, there is a configuration in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and dynamic display based on a special symbol corresponding to each starting port can be executed at the same time. In such a configuration, if a lottery based on any of the special symbols is won, by suspending (or stopping) the dynamic display based on the other special symbols, any special symbol will be won. A gaming machine configured to make it easy to understand has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In this case, if the lottery result of one special symbol is successful, the dynamic display based on the other special symbol is interrupted (or stopped). As a result, the chances of lottery based on a special symbol that gives a privilege that is advantageous to the player are reduced, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered. The purpose of this technical feature is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine D1, the first determination is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination are dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information, which are dynamically displayed by the display control means, are determined by the dynamic display period determination means from a plurality of dynamic display periods. It is determined. A first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first determination result or the second determination result is a specific first determination result or a second determination result, and a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. It is determined by the privilege determining means that at least one of the above is given to the player.

The dynamic display in which the first identification information indicating that it is a specific first determination result is displayed and the dynamic display in which the second identification information indicating that it is a specific second determination result is displayed are dynamically performed at the same time. Display is regulated by dynamic display regulation means. When it is determined by the determination means that it is not a specific second determination result, the establishment of the special second determination result that grants a special privilege different from the second privilege is determined by the special determination means. The second identification information indicating that the establishment of the special second determination result is determined by the special determination means is dynamically displayed by the special dynamic display means.

As a result, even when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is already dynamically displayed, the second identification information indicating the special second determination result can be simultaneously displayed on the display means. Therefore, special benefits can be efficiently given to the player. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine D1, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-entry means. The privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the ball, and the variable ball entering means in the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied as the first privilege or the second privilege. It has a variable privilege game and a privilege game execution means for executing the special privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in a short period of time equal to or less than the privilege game as the special privilege. The gaming machine D2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, as a special privilege, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in a short period of time equal to or less than the privilege game executed by the first privilege or the second privilege. Therefore, as a special privilege, the player can be given a privilege equal to or less than the privilege obtained by the first privilege or the second privilege, and the privilege obtained by the player is increased while suppressing the gambling from becoming too high. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D2, a special gaming state in which the probability that the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is determined is higher than in the normal time is set, and the specific first determination result or the specific It has a probability setting means for setting at least one of a normal gaming state in which the probability that the second determination result is determined is set to the probability in the normal time, and in the second privilege, the special gaming state is set after the privilege game. D3 is a gaming machine D3, characterized in that is set by the probability setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, in the second privilege, a special gaming state is set after the privilege game, so that the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game by expecting the player to be granted either the first privilege or the second privilege.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the specific first determination result is obtained, the privilege determining means is configured to easily grant the first privilege as compared with the case where the specific second determination result is obtained. The gaming machine D4, which is characterized in that it has been used.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it can be expected that a specific second determination result is obtained, and the game is expected to satisfy the second condition. It has the effect of being able to do.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, when the normal gaming state is set, the first condition is configured to be more easily satisfied than the second condition, and when the special gaming state is set, the special gaming state is set. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the second condition is configured to be more easily satisfied than the first condition.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied by being in the special gaming state, so that the second privilege is given as compared with the normal gaming state. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the chances of the game and to make it easier for the player to continuously receive the second privilege.

In the game machine D5, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and an opening in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball-entry means. The gaming machine D6 is characterized by having a state and a variable means that can be changed to a regulated state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted rather than the open state.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, there is an effect that the ball entry rate to the second ball entry means can be easily changed.

In the game machine D6, the first flow path through which the game ball flows down, the second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the first flow path based on the operation of the player. Each of the second flow paths has a launching means capable of launching a game ball, the first ball entry means is arranged in the first flow path, and the second flow path has the above-mentioned. The gaming machine D7, wherein the first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means are arranged respectively.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, when the game is played by inserting the game ball into the second ball entry means, the game ball is also inserted into the first ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity for the first identification information and the second identification information to be dynamically displayed at the same time can be increased. Since the first privilege is easily given to the first identification information, it is possible to suppress a problem that the second privilege is continuously given too much. Further, the player wishes that the first identification information does not display the specific first determination result by dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the second identification information displays the specific second determination result. This has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D7, the first ball-entry means arranged in the second flow path is configured to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first ball-entry means arranged in the first flow path. When the normal gaming state is set, the gaming ball is configured to be easier to enter into the first ball-entry means arranged in the first flow path than the second ball-entry means. When the special gaming state is set, the variable means is set to be more easily variable to the open state than in the normal gaming state, so that the first channel arranged in the first flow path. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to be easier to enter into the second entering means than the first entering means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D7, the flow path performed by the player by letting the gaming ball flow down can be switched between the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, thereby giving a change to the game. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Resurrection production during the probable change period)
A discrimination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and a first determination result of the first determination by the determination means are shown. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result of the second discrimination on the display means at the same time, and the display control means dynamically displaying the first identification information and the display control means. It is determined by the dynamic display period determining means for determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information from a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the discriminating means. By a probability setting means for setting either a high probability state having a higher probability than the normal time or a low probability state having a probability lower than the high probability state in the normal time, and the dynamic display period determining means. It has an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the determined information of the first dynamic display period, and the probability setting means has a first setting condition when the specific first determination result is obtained. The low-probability state is set based on the fact that the above-mentioned is satisfied, and the high-probability state is set based on the fact that the second setting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that when is determined, a specific effect is executed.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. Is executed in. If the lottery result is a win, the probability of being determined to be a win is higher than the normal normal probability game state after the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine in which one of the stochastic gaming states is set has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the player pays attention to whether or not the high-probability gaming state is continuously set after the privilege game is executed in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it has been required to further improve the interest in the production regarding whether or not the high-probability gaming state is continued. The purpose of this technical feature is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest.

According to the gaming machine E1, when a specific first determination result is determined, a low probability state or a high probability state is set by the probability setting means. It is possible to notify in advance that there is a possibility that the game will be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E1, the specific effect includes an effect suggesting based on the first setting condition or the second setting condition that establishes which of the low-probability state and the high-probability gaming state is set. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by being mumps.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, there is an effect that it is possible to predict at an early stage whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state by a specific effect.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means are at least the first condition or the first condition. A storage means that is stored until the two conditions are satisfied, a pre-determination means that determines the information stored in the storage means before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination thereof. It has a pre-period determination means for preliminarily determining the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result of the means. The gaming machine E3, wherein the effect executed by the effect executing means includes period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period determined by the prior period determination means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first identification is performed by executing the effect including the period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period determined by the prior period determining means. There is an effect that the period during which the information is dynamically displayed can be notified to the player before the start of the dynamic display, and the player can be made to recognize the flow of the game at an early stage and play the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes the remaining period information suggesting the remaining period until the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is set. The gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the remaining period until the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state is suggested by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Since the period information is notified, there is an effect that the game can be played with a higher probability of being determined by the second determination. In addition, there is an effect that the period in which the high probability state is given can be easily understood.

A gaming machine E5, wherein in any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the satisfaction of the second setting condition.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a specific effect is executed based on the satisfaction of the second setting condition, so that the player is set to a high probability state. It is possible to notify at the timing when it is decided that the game will be performed, which has the effect of being able to perform a more innovative effect.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is a pre-condition determination means capable of determining whether or not the second setting condition can be satisfied before starting the dynamic display of the first identification information. However, the effect executing means starts executing the specific effect when it is determined by the pre-condition determining means that the second setting condition can be satisfied. Machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the execution of a specific effect can be started before the second setting condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect can be started. It has the effect of suggesting the establishment to the player in advance and raising the player's expectations.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, and E1 to E6. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, and E1 to E6, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, and E1 to E6, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for notifying the lottery result is displayed as a display device. Is executed in. If the lottery result is a win, the probability of being determined to be a win is higher than that of the normal normal probability game state after the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine in which one of the stochastic gaming states is set has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, it has been required to further improve the interest of the game.
It is an object of the present technical idea to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. , The first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination can be dynamically displayed on the display means at the same time. The display control means, the first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information are set from a plurality of dynamic display periods, respectively. Either the dynamic display period determining means to be determined and the high-probability state in which the probability of being determined by the discriminating means is higher than the normal time and the low-probability state in which the probability of being determined by the discriminating means is lower than the high-probability state in the normal time. The probability setting means includes a probability setting means for setting the above and an effect executing means for executing the effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A device that sets the low-probability state based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied when the specific first determination result is obtained, and sets the high-probability state based on the fact that the second setting condition is satisfied. The effect executing means executes a specific effect when the specific first determination result is determined.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the first setting condition for satisfying whether the specific effect is set to the low probability state or the high probability gaming state. Alternatively, it includes an effect suggested based on the second setting condition.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition in the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 and 2. The storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored until at least the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the information stored in the storage means, the first condition or the second condition. The first dynamic display period or the second dynamic determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the pre-determination means for determining before the condition is satisfied and the determination result of the pre-determination means. The effect executed by the effect executing means has a pre-period determination means for determining the display period in advance, and the period corresponding to the first dynamic display period determined by the pre-period determination means. It contains information.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the effect executed by the effect executing means is set by shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. It contains information on the remaining period that suggests the remaining period until it is done.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a discrimination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and executing the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the discrimination means thereof. A display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination on the display means at the same time. , Dynamically determining the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods, respectively. Probability of setting either the display period determining means and the high probability state in which the probability of being determined by the discriminating means is higher than in the normal time or the low probability state in which the probability is lower than the high probability state in the normal time. The probability setting means includes the setting means and the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the probability setting means is the specific first. The low-probability state is set based on the fact that the first setting condition is satisfied when one determination result is obtained, and the high-probability state is set based on the fact that the second setting condition is satisfied. The effect executing means executes a specific effect when the specific first determination result is determined. As a result, when a specific first determination result is determined, a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific effect is the low probability state and the high probability. It includes an effect suggesting based on the first setting condition or the second setting condition that establishes which of the gaming state is set. As a result, an effect suggesting whether the low-probability state or the high-probability gaming state is set by the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, information is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition or the second acquisition condition in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 and 2. The information acquisition means, the storage means in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored until at least the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and the information stored in the storage means are described. The first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the pre-determination means for determining before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the determination result of the pre-determination means. The effect executed by the effect executing means has the pre-period determination means for determining the period or the second dynamic display period in advance, and the effect determined by the pre-period determination means is the first action. It includes period information corresponding to the target display period. As a result, the first dynamic display period can be determined in advance by the prior period determination means, and the period information corresponding to the first dynamic display period can be executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the effect executed by the effect executing means is from the high probability state to the low probability state. It contains the remaining period information that suggests the remaining period until the transition to the stochastic state is set. As a result, the effect executing means executes the remaining period information suggesting the remaining period until the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S305, S705 Discrimination means S505, S905 Dynamic display period determination means S506, S906 Display control means S1282 Probability setting means S6009 Production execution means

Claims (1)

An information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition.
A storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the first determination based on the first information stored in the storage means is executed, and based on the establishment of the second condition, the second information stored in the storage means is used. Discrimination means for executing the second discrimination and
Simultaneously causing the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for showing the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means and the second identification information for showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination. Display control means that can be used
It is possible to determine the first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods. Dynamic display period determination means
Preliminary determination means for determining the first information or the second information stored in the storage means before the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, and
Based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, the pre-period determination means for preliminarily determining the first dynamic display period or the second dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and
A probability setting means for setting either a high probability state having a higher probability than the normal time or a low probability state having a probability determined by the discrimination means lower than the high probability state in the normal time.
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.
When the mode of the first identification information indicating that the determination is determined as the specific first determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed, the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game are exhibited. Either one is enabled and
The probability setting means sets the low probability state after the end of the first privilege game, and the game ball enters a specific area in which the game ball can be entered during the execution of the second privilege game. The high probability state is set after the end of the second privilege game based on the ball.
The effect executed by the effect executing means when the high probability state is set is the determined effect when the predetermined means determines that the first privilege game is executed. When the first effect capable of identifying the remaining period until the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first information is started is executed, and the second privilege game is executed by the pre-determination means. When it is determined, a second effect capable of identifying the remaining period until the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determined first information is started is executed.
The gaming machine, the second in award game in which the first dynamic display period corresponding to the first information the second award game is determined to be executed by the pre determining means is performed after the completion The effect of increasing the remaining period after suggesting that the remaining period executed in the second effect is increased based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area is configured to be feasible. game machine, characterized in that the Ru Oh.

Images